TANDBERG TT1260 Reference Manual
The TANDBERG TT1260 is a versatile Contribution Receiver designed for broadcasters and distributors of video, audio, and data services over satellite. It offers a wide range of features and input options, including support for DVB-S, DVB-S2, and COFDM signals. You can use it to receive and decode various broadcast signals, including those that are encrypted with conditional access systems like BISS, RAS, and TANDBERG Director. The TT1260 also includes local and remote control capabilities, allowing you to manage your reception and signal processing effectively.
Advertisement
Advertisement
TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Issue 3
ENGLISH (UK)
REFERENCE GUIDE
TT1260 Contribution Receiver
Software Version 5.2.1 (and later)
TT1260/DIRBAS,
TT1260/CIBAS[/48] and
Options
Preliminary Pages
ENGLISH (UK)
READ THIS FIRST!
If you do not understand the contents of this manual
DO NOT OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT .
Also, translation into any EC official language of this manual can be made available, at your cost.
SVENSKA
LÄS DETTA FÖRST!
Om Ni inte förstår informationen i denna handbok
ARBETA DÅ INTE MED DENNA UTRUSTNING .
En översättning till detta språk av denna handbok kan också anskaffas, på Er bekostnad.
PORTUGUÊS
LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA!
Se não compreende o texto deste manual
NÃO UTILIZE O EQUIPAMENTO.
O utilizador poderá também obter uma tradução do manual para o português à própria custa.
FRANÇAIS
AVANT TOUT, LISEZ CE QUI SUIT!
Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel
NE FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL.
En outre, nous pouvons vous proposer, à vos frais, une version française de ce manuel.
DEUTSCH
LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS!
Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verständlich sein, dann
BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GERÄTE NICHT!
Eine Übersetzung des Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen
Berechnung lieferbar.
ESPAÑOL
LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO!
Si no entiende el contenido de este manual
NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO.
Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al
(idioma) previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deberá abonar usted mismo.
ITALIANO
LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO!
Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale
NON UTILIZZARE L’APPARECCHIATURA .
È anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo manuale, ma il costo è a carico dell’utente.
NEDERLANDS
LEES DIT EERST!
Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt
STEL DEZE APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING.
U kunt tevens, op eigen kosten, een vertaling van deze handleiding krijgen.
SUOMI
LUE ENNEN KÄYTTÖÄ!
Jos et ymmärrä käsikirjan sisältöä
ÄLÄ KÄYTÄ LAITETTA.
Käsikirja voidaan myös suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella.
DANSK
LÆS DETTE FØRST!
Udstyret må ikke betjenes
MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTÅR INDHOLDET AF DENNE
HÅNDBOG.
Vi kan også for Deres regning levere en dansk oversættelse af denne håndbog.
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ
∆ΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΠΡΩΤΑ ΑΥΤΟ !
Αν δεν καταλάβετε το περιεχό µ ενο αυτού του βοηθή µ ατος / εγχειριδίου
ΜΗΝ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΗΣΕΤΕ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ .
Επίσης , αυτό το εγχειρίδιο είναι διαθέσι µ ο σε µ ετάφραση
σε αυτή τη γλώσσα και µ πορείτε να το αγοράσετε .
This document and the information contained in it is the property of TANDBERG Television Ltd and may be the subject of patents pending and granted. It must not be used for commercial purposes nor copied, disclosed, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise), whether in whole or in part, without TANDBERG Television’s prior written agreement.
2004 - 2007 TANDBERG Television Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Issue 3 first published in 2007 by:
T ANDBERG T ELEVISION L TD
R EGISTERED A DDRESS :
U NIT 2 S TRATEGIC P ARK , C OMINES W AY ,
H EDGE E ND , S OUTHAMPTON ,
H AMPSHIRE ,
SO30 4DA
U NITED K INGDOM
Registered Company Number 03695535
Page ii Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Preliminary Pages
List of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
This chapter identifies the equipment versions covered by this manual; describes the purpose of the equipment in a typical system; provides a summary of its main features; identifies the controls, indicators and connectors in a guided tour of the front and rear panels; and lists the available options.
Chapter 2: Installing the Equipment
This chapter provides a guide to the suitability of an installation; gives detailed procedures for the preparation, installation and configuration of the equipment including important safety
information; provides pin-out details of the external connectors; and details the power-up/down procedures.
Chapter 3: Operating the Equipment Locally
This chapter provides a guide to using the local Front Panel LCD user interface; describes the menus, screens and options available to the user; and details the setting-up, configuration and operating procedures.
Chapter 4: Operating the Equipment Remotely
This chapter provides a guide to configuring and preparing the unit for remote operation.
Chapter 5: Alarms
This chapter provides a guide to configuring the alarm interface.
Chapter 6: Options
This chapter describes the available hardware and software options for the IRD.
Chapter 7: Preventive Maintenance and Fault-Finding
This chapter details routine maintenance tasks to be performed; provides general servicing advice, and information regarding warranty and maintenance; lists the error messages that may occur, and any appropriate Operator action to be taken; provides general fault-finding information for other types of problem which may be encountered; and provides relevant disposal information.
Annex A: Glossary
Annex B: Technical Specification
Annex C: Menus
Annex D: Language Abbreviations
Annex E: Using the TT1260 with the TANDBERG Director System
Annex F: Factory Defaults
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page iii
Preliminary Pages
About this Reference Guide
This Reference Guide provides instructions and information for the installation, operation of the TT1260 Contribution Receiver.
This Reference Guide should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life of the equipment. It is not intended that this Reference Guide will be amended by the issue of individual pages. Any revision will be by a complete reissue. Further copies of this Reference
Guide can be ordered from the address shown on page vii. If passing the equipment to a third party, also pass the relevant documentation.
Information about this equipment was originally published as an Instruction Manual under the number ST.TM.E10100. Issues of that manual are listed below:
Issue Date
1
2
March 2002 2.1
May 2002 2.1
4 Dec 2003 2.2 – 3.0
Initial release.
Changes to Annex B Technical Specification, Chapter 4 added.
DVB Common Interface, COFDM Demodulation, 4:2:0 Video Only
Option.
TTV G.703 Interface, SNMP Control, High Speed Data over Ethernet.
Since June 2004, information has been published in the form of a User Guide and Reference
Guide. Issues of the Reference Guide (ST.RE.E10100) are listed below:
Issue Date
Inclusion of DVB-S2 information (Never Officially Released Issue 2 for
Reference Only)
The following documents are also associated with this equipment:
•
ST.US.E10100: User Guide
General
All best endeavours have been made to acknowledge registered trademarks and trademarks used throughout this manual. Any notified omissions will be rectified in the next issue of this manual. Some trademarks may be registered in some jurisdictions but not in others.
Registered trademarks and trademarks used are acknowledged below and marked with their respective symbols. However, they are not marked within the text of this Reference Guide.
Registered Trademarks
Ethernet
®
is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
VideoGuard
®
is a registered trademark of NDS Limited.
Dolby Digital
®
and AC-3
®
are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation .
Trademarks
Alteia
™
is a trademark of TANDBERG Television Limited.
Page iv Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Preliminary Pages
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. The manufacturer can not be held responsible for injuries or damage where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly.
Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product is operated.
Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
Retain Instructions
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
WARNINGS….
WARNINGS GIVE INFORMATION WHICH, IF STRICTLY OBSERVED, WILL PREVENT PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO PERSONAL PROPERTY OR THE ENVIRONMENT. THEY
ARE BOXED AND SHADED FOR EMPHASIS, AS IN THIS EXAMPLE, AND ARE PLACED
IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE POINT AT WHICH THE READER REQUIRES THEM.
CAUTIONS…
Cautions give information which, if strictly followed, will prevent damage to equipment or other goods.
They are boxed for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately preceding the point at which the reader requires them.
NOTES…
Notes provide supplementary information. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the relevant text.
EMC Compliance
This equipment is certified to the EMC requirements detailed in Annex B, Technical
Specification. To maintain this certification, only use the leads supplied or if in doubt contact
Customer Services.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page v
Preliminary Pages
Contact Information
TANDBERG Television Customer Services
Support Services
Our primary objective is to provide first class customer care that is tailored to your specific business and operational requirements. All levels are supported by one or more service performance reviews to ensure the perfect partnership between TANDBERG Television and your business.
Warranty
All TANDBERG Products and Systems are designed and built to the highest standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
Levels of Continuing TANDBERG Television Service Support
For stand-alone equipment, then TANDBERG Television
BASIC Advantage is the value for money choice for you.
BASIC provides you with year-by-year Service long after the warranty has expired.
For systems support you can choose either Gold or Silver Advantage. These packages are designed to save you costs and protect your income through enlisting the help of TANDBERG
Television support specialists.
VOYAGER Advantage is the truly mobile service solution. This provides a package specifically designed to keep you mobile and operational.
Call TANDBERG Sales for more details.
Where to Find Us
Europe, Middle East +44 (0) 23 8048 4455 and Africa: Fax: +44 (0) 23 8048 4467
Americas: +888 671 1268 (US and Canada)
+678 812 6255 (Outside of mainland US)
China: +86 10 6856 0260 (Beijing)
+852 2530 3215 (Hong Kong)
Australia/NZ: +612 8923 0450
Internet Address: http://www.tandbergtv.com
Page vi Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Preliminary Pages
Technical Training
Training Courses
TANDBERG Television provides a wide range of training courses on the operation and maintenance of our products and on their supporting technologies. TANDBERG can provide both regularly scheduled courses and training tailored to individual needs. Courses can be run either at your premises or at one of our dedicated training facilities.
Where to Find Us
For further information on TANDBERG Television's training programme please contact us:
International Telephone:
International Facsimile
+44 23 8048 4229
+44 23 8048 4467
E-mail Address:
Internet Address [email protected] http://www.tandbergtv.com
Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address
Tandberg Television
Unit 2
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
Return of Equipment
If you need to return equipment for repair, please contact the Customer Services Helpdesk on
+44 (0) 23 8048 4455. A Returns Authorisation Number (RAN) will be issued and full details of the unit will be logged. Please ensure the RAN number is clearly marked on the packaging of the unit. The unit should then be sent to the following address:
Tandberg Television – Customer Services
Unit 1
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
Return of Equipment
Please contact the Customer Services Helpdesk on +44 (0) 23 8048 4455 to be issued with a
Returns Authorisation Number. A Repair/service Order Form (ROF) form and a proforma invoice (for customs purposes) should be sent with each unit (these are included at the rear of this manual). Please quote your Returns Authorisation Number. The proforma invoice also needs to be faxed to TTV Customer service in Norway on +47 67 116 201. TNT should then be contacted to collect your unit quoting the TANDBERG TNT account number 237067.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page vii
Preliminary Pages
Technical Publications
If you need to contact TANDBERG Television Technical Publications regarding this publication, e-mail: [email protected].
Page viii Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Chapter 1
1.
Introduction
Contents
Scope of This Reference Guide ........................ 1-3
1.1.1
Who Should Use This Reference
Guide ..................................................... 1-3
1.1.2
What Equipment is Covered by This
Reference Guide.................................... 1-3
The Equipment Models .......................... 1-3
Software Version ................................... 1-3
Summary of Features........................................ 1-4
Main Features ........................................ 1-4
Inputs ..................................................... 1-6
ASI Inputs (Decoder) [Option] ................ 1-6
QPSK L-Band Inputs (Satellite
Receivers) [Option] ................................ 1-6
QPSK/ASI Inputs (Satellite Receivers)
[Option] .................................................. 1-6
Higher Order Modulation Inputs
(Satellite Receivers) [Option] ................. 1-6
DVB-S2 Inputs (Satellite Receivers)
[Option] .................................................. 1-6
COFDM Input (Terrestrial Receivers)
[Option] .................................................. 1-6
TANDBERGTV G.703 Input (Telco
Receivers) [Option] ................................ 1-7
ATM AAL-1 DS3 Input (Telco
Receivers) [Option] ................................ 1-7
ATM AAL-1 E3 Input (Telco
Receivers) [Option] ................................ 1-7
IP Input [Option] ..................................... 1-7
Remote Control...................................... 1-7
Frame Synchronisation .......................... 1-7
Outputs .................................................. 1-7
Transport Stream Outputs ..................... 1-7
Video Outputs ........................................ 1-7
Audio Outputs ........................................ 1-7
Data Output ........................................... 1-7
Alarm Output.......................................... 1-7
Alarm Output [Option] ............................ 1-8
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Conditional Access and Scrambling.......1-8
The Satellite Receiver .......................................1-9
Typical Satellite System .........................1-9
Input Connections ..................................1-9
What the Satellite Receiver Does...........1-9
1.3.4
Over-air Software Download
(TANDBERG Director Systems)...........1-10
The Telco Receiver/Decoder...........................1-11
Typical Decoder System ......................1-11
Input Connections ................................1-11
What the Decoder Does .......................1-11
TT1260 Control Modes....................................1-12
Introduction ..........................................1-12
Front Panel (Local) Modes ...................1-12
Remote Control Modes ........................1-13
RS-232/RS-485 Port ............................1-13
Network ................................................1-13
1.5.4
TANDBERG DirectorV5 NCP Control
Mode ....................................................1-13
Guided Tour ....................................................1-13
Construction .........................................1-13
Front Panel Controls ............................1-13
Front Panel LEDs.................................1-14
Bit Error Ratio Measurement................1-14
1.6.5
Conditional Access and Scrambling
Options.................................................1-14
TANDBERG DirectorV5 .......................1-14
Remote Authorisation System (RAS 1
and 2) ...................................................1-14
Basic Interoperable Scrambling
System (BISS)......................................1-14
Signal Protection ..................................1-14
DVB Common Interface .......................1-15
Rear Panel ...........................................1-15
Page 1-1
Introduction
List of Figures
Figure 1.1: Front View of the TT1260 ................................... 1-3
Figure 1.2: Typical Satellite Compression System................ 1-9
Figure 1.3: What the Satellite Receiver Does ..................... 1-10
Figure 1.4: Typical Download Transmission System .......... 1-10
Figure 1.5: Typical Compression System ........................... 1-11
Figure 1.6: Role of the Decoder .......................................... 1-12
Figure 1.7: Front Panel States ............................................ 1-12
Figure 1.8: Front Panel Controls ......................................... 1-14
Figure 1.9: TT1260 Decoder Rear Panel ............................ 1-15
List of Tables
Table 1.1: Equipment Model Descriptions.............................1-3
Page 1-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
Introduction
Scope of This Reference Guide
Who Should Use This Reference Guide
This Reference Guide is written for operators/users of variants of the TT1260 Contribution
Receiver and options. It describes the unit’s functions and operation. The Reference Guide is written to assist in the installation and day-to-day care and operation of the unit. Maintenance information requiring the covers to be removed is not included.
WARNING…
DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED. ONLY
TANDBERG TELEVISION TRAINED AND APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO
SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION…
Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements may affect the equipment specification and invalidate any warranties.
What Equipment is Covered by This Reference Guide
The Equipment Models
The IRD described in this Reference Guide is the base model.
Figure 1.1: Front View of the TT1260
Table 1.1: Equipment Model Descriptions
Model Number
Basic TT1260 with Common
Interface hardware
Basic TT1260 with Common
Interface hardware
(-48 Vdc version)
Basic TT1260 with Director hardware
Marketing Code Description
TT1260/CIBAS
TT1260/CIBAS/48V MPEG-2 SD Decoder with integrated Common Interface CAM reader,
-48 Vdc voltage input. MPEG 4:2:2 video decode.
TT1260/DIRBAS
MPEG-2 SD Decoder with integrated Common Interface CAM reader, AC mains voltage input. MPEG 4:2:2 video decode.
MPEG-2 SD Decoder with integrated Director Smart Card Reader,
AC mains voltage input. MPEG 4:2:2 video decode.
Software Version
This Reference Guide covers the functions of software version 5.2.1 and later.
To verify the installed version access the Systems Menu (Menu 6.2). The menus are described in Annex C, Menus.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 1-3
Introduction
1.2 Summary of Features
The TT1260 is fully compliant with the appropriate sections of the MPEG-2
1
, DVB-S
2
and
DSNG
3
specifications and offers the following features:
•
Front Panel Controls and Indications:
A vertical split two line x 40 character back-lit dot matrix LCD display with pushbuttons for Up, Down, Left, Right, Edit, and Save to provide information and operator choice entry
LEDs to indicate lock and general alarm conditions
•
Service Selection:
Chosen from a menu list of available services carried in the currently received transport stream
Up to 40 preselected choices can be stored within the unit
•
Signal Inputs:
ASI input (option)
QPSK (Satellite Receivers) L-band input (option)
QPSK/ASI (Satellite Receivers) input (option)
16QAM/8PSK (Satellite Receivers) L-band input (option)
HOM QPSK, 8PSK,16QAM, BPSK (Satellite Receivers) L-band input (option)
DVB-S QPSK and DVB-S2 QPSK, 8PSK (Satellite Receivers) L-band input (option)
COFDM (Terrestrial Receivers) input (option)
TANDBERGTV G.703 (DS3 and E3) (Telco Receivers) input (option)
MPEG over IP (Telco Receivers) input (option)
ATM AAL-1 DS3 (Telco Receivers) input (option)
ATM AAL-1 E3 (Telco Receivers) input (option)
•
Signal Outputs:
ASI Transport Stream output
Digital Video (SDI) output
Analogue Video (CVBS) output
Analogue/Digital Audio output
Asynchronous Data (RS232) output
ATM AAL-1 DS3 (Telco Receivers) output (option)
ATM AAL-1 E3 (Telco Receivers) output (option)
•
Video Decoding:
4:2:0 mode support video resolutions up to 720 pixels x 576 active lines (25 frame/s) or 720 pixels x 480 active lines (30 frame/s)
4:2:2 mode support video resolutions up to 720 pixels x 608 active lines (25 frame/s) or 720 pixels x 512 active lines (30 frame/s)
1
2
Moving Pictures Expert Group: MPEG-2 specification ISO 13818.
European Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Project. EN 300 421 Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data services:
Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for the 11/12 GHz satellite service.
3
European Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Project : EN 301 210 Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data services:
Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for digital satellite news gathering (DSNG) and other contribution applications by satellite.
Page 1-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Introduction
Support for PAL- I, B, G, D, PAL- N, PAL- M, and NTSC-M (with pedestal or without) composite video output via two 75 BNC connectors
•
Audio Decoding:
Sampling rates 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
All MPEG-1 data rates
All Dolby Digital AC-3 data rates, decoded as a Dolby Stereo downmix
Linear uncompressed audio, data rates as defined by SMPTE 302M
•
Data:
Low Speed Data: RS-232 asynchronous (up to 38.4 kbit/s)
High Speed Data: RS-422 synchronous (up to 2.048 Mbit/s) (option)
High Speed Data: Ethernet Data-piping (up to 5 Mbit/s) (option)
•
Transport Stream Output:
ASI transport stream output with maximum data rate 160 Mbit/s (encrypted or partially decrypted)
•
Conditional Access/Scrambling:
Remote Authorisation System (RAS) version I and II (option)
EBU Basic Interoperable Scrambling System BISS Mode 1 and Mode E
(as specified in EBU Tech 3292 May 2002)
TANDBERG DirectorV5 (option)
TANDBERG Television Signal Protection (option)
DVB Common Interface (option)
•
TANDBERG Director system:
Over-air remote control is available if the TT1260 is used as part of a TANDBERG
Director system (Over-air software downloading,
Re-start, Tuning and Retuning etc.)
NOTES…
1. The TANDBERG Director system GUI counts the inputs from zero (i.e. 0, 1).
2. TANDBERG Director Versions 4 and onward allow selection of the L-band (RF) input.
•
Remote Control:
RS-232 or RS-485
SNMP
Web Browser control
Over-the-Air remote control via Director
When the remote control is active, front panel control is disabled but status information is still available (protocol is available from TANDBERG Television
Limited)
•
Clock/Calendar:
Available to co-ordinate universal and local time
Constantly updated when locked to a valid transport stream
•
Transport Stream Demultiplexing:
Maximum capability is 160 Mbit/s, depending on CA in use and input front end
•
Video Decoding:
Maximum Video decoding capability of 50 Mbit/s
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 1-5
Introduction
•
Audio:
Audio embedding in the digital video output (compressed AC-3 not supported)
•
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) signalling support:
Video Programming System (VPS)/Programme Delivery Control (PDC) data and pass through
Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) data and pass through
Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC) insertion (525 and 625 line)
Video Index data
Neilson Coding AMOL 1 and AMOL 2
Support for Closed Captioning (ATSC, Echostar and TTV)
Insertion Test Signal (ITS) insertion (CCIR and FCC/UK)
World System Teletext (WST)
Inverted Teletext (WST)
North American Basic Teletext (NABTS)
Vertical Interval Test Signal (VITS) (525 and 625 line)
Decode of VBI in Video (4:2:2 only)
•
Error Data Handling (EDH):
EDH is supported on the SDI (digital video) output
•
Frame Synchronisation of digital video output to analogue input
NOTE…
All models have analogue outputs as standard.
1.2.2 Inputs
Page 1-6
ASI Inputs (Decoder) [Option]
Two BNC connectors support both byte-mode and single packet burst mode.
QPSK L-Band Inputs (Satellite Receivers) [Option]
Two F-type connectors connect the L-band output of a suitable LNB either directly or via a suitable attenuator giving lightning and surge protection.
QPSK/ASI Inputs (Satellite Receivers) [Option]
Two F-type (QPSK) connector connects the L-band output of a suitable LNB either directly or via a suitable attenuator giving lightning and surge protection. Two BNC connectors support both byte-mode and single packet burst mode.
Higher Order Modulation Inputs (Satellite Receivers) [Option]
Four F-type connectors for reception of QPSK, 8PSK or 16QAM modulated signal.
DVB-S2 Inputs (Satellite Receivers) [Option]
Four L-band F-type connectors (or three L-band F-type plus one IF BNC connector) for reception of DVB-S QPSK and DVB-S2 QPSK and 8PSK modulated signals
COFDM Input (Terrestrial Receivers) [Option]
Equipped with a BNC connector for receiving a COFDM modulated signal.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Introduction
TANDBERGTV G.703 Input (Telco Receivers) [Option]
Equipped with a single BNC connector for receiving signals over a PDH Telco network.
ATM AAL-1 DS3 Input (Telco Receivers) [Option]
Equipped with two BNC connectors for receiving full-duplex signals over a PDH Telco network.
ATM AAL-1 E3 Input (Telco Receivers) [Option]
Equipped with two BNC connectors for receiving full-duplex signals over a PDH Telco network.
IP Input [Option]
An RJ-45 connector for receiving MPEG-2 signals over an Ethernet network.
Remote Control
An RJ-45 Ethernet connector connects to a PC or network switch to provide a network connection for use with SNMP control.
Frame Synchronisation
A BNC connector accepts a composite video input to which the video output timing can be synchronised.
1.2.3 Outputs
Transport Stream Outputs
•
Two BNC connectors output ASI Transport Streams with a maximum data rate of
160 Mbit/s (encrypted or partially decrypted) and a minimum data rate of 66 Mbit/s
(decrypted).
Video Outputs
•
Two analogue composite video outputs carried on BNC connectors.
•
Two digital video outputs carried on BNC connectors.
Audio Outputs
•
Two 9-way D-type, female connectors decode two PES streams of audio from the
Transport Stream. The audio outputs simultaneous analogue and digital. The digital mode can be changed via the user interface.
Data Output
•
RS-232 asynchronous low-speed data output carried on a 9-way, D-type, female connector.
•
RJ-45 high-speed data over Ethernet output (option).
•
RS-422 synchronous high-speed data output carried on a 9-way D-type, female connector (option).
Alarm Output
A 9-way D-type connector for alarm and failure monitoring is carried out within the equipment.
This produces a summary alarm signal and also lights the general front-panel ALARM LED.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 1-7
Introduction
1.2.4
Alarm Output [Option]
A 25-way D-type connector on the Alarm Relay Card Option (TT1260/HDC/ALRM) has six relays for failure monitoring for NCP over-air. The operator can define (using the Alarms
Menu 5) which alarm conditions drive the relays. This is described in Chapter 5, Alarms and
Annex C, Menus.
Conditional Access and Scrambling
The transport stream received by the IRD may be encrypted. The CA system is used to decrypt the required components of the transport stream so that they can be decoded.
The following Conditional Access and Scrambling options are available for the TT1260 range of Satellite Receivers and Decoders:
•
No Conditional Access
•
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System, BISS Mode 1 and Mode E only.
•
TANDBERG DirectorV5
•
Remote Authorisation System (RAS) 1 and 2
•
Signal Protection
•
DVB Common Interface
•
Provider Lock
BISS (as specified in EBU Tech 3292 May 2002) is standard on all Receivers/Decoders.
The different CA options can be combined, for instance:
•
TANDBERG Director, RAS and BISS (however, streams with mixed CA are not supported)
However, it is not possible to have both DVB Common Interface and TANDBERG Director on the same unit.
When the CA system uses a smart card or Common Interface Module, access by the user is via the back panel of the IRD.
Page 1-8 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Introduction
1.3 The Satellite Receiver
The TT1260 Satellite Receiver is a component of the MPEG-2/DVB compliant range of
TANDBERG Television equipment. It is designed for use by broadcasters and distributors of video, audio and data services over satellite.
1.3.2
TANDBERG
Input Connections
The Satellite Receiver interfaces directly to Low-Noise Block (LNB) and accepts an intermediate frequency (IF) input in the band 950 - 2150 MHz (L-band) for operation in the specified symbol-rate range (see Annex B, Technical Specification). The unit can provide DC power and polarisation switching to the LNB. evolution 5000
Encoder (1)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ± evolution 5000
Multiplexer (Main) evolution 5000
Modulator (Main)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 *
±
Ethernet evolution 5000
Encoder (2)
TANDBERG
TANDBERG
Local
Inputs
TANDBERG
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ±
Ethernet
Control
Ethernet
Control
TANDBERG
TANDBERG
Ethernet evolution 5000
Encoder (n)
TT1260
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ± evolution 5000
Multiplexer (Standby) evolution 5000
Modulator (Standby)
Up-converter and HPA
TANDBERG
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 *
± TANDBERG
TANDBERG
Ethernet
Transport Stream
Processor
Ethernet
Control
Ethernet
Control
MPEG-2
Transport
Stream
10BaseT
Ethernet Hub evolution 5000 nCompass Control
Figure 1.2: Typical Satellite Compression System
Ethernet
Control
1.3.3 What the Satellite Receiver Does
The Receiver can be tuned to a specified satellite channel frequency and polarisation. The input is down-converted via a Low-Noise Block (LNB) to provide an L-band input to the
Receiver. The front-end tuning is microprocessor controlled with a frequency synthesised local oscillator. A software tuning and acquisition algorithm resolves translation errors (mainly due to the LNB).
The signal is then passed to a demodulator that recovers the signal using soft-decision decoding. The resulting stream is Reed-Solomon decoded and descrambled to provide inputs to the Decoder circuit. The received channel may contain multiple services, therefore the
Receiver’s demultiplexer is configured to select a single video service and other audio/data components and present them at the output.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 1-9
Introduction
1.3.4 horizontal polarisation vertical polarisation f n+1 f n
Low-Noise Block
SHF f n+2 f n+3 f n+4
L-band
Tune to a satellite channel
TT1260 Satellite Receiver
Select a service from the satellite channel
Select the components from the chosen service
Multiple satellite channels
Multiple services on the tuned satellite channel
Multiple components on the selected service
Figure 1.3: What the Satellite Receiver Does
Video
Audio
Data
Transport Stream
Over-air Software Download
(TANDBERG Director Systems)
The TT1260 Satellite Receiver is shipped with the appropriate software installed, but it is designed to allow replacement of this code by new versions of software transmitted over-air.
The new code is downloaded as a background task in the same transport stream as used for
the normal transmission of services.
Figure 1.4 shows the system required for this function. The existing software continues to function during the download process. Once all the new code has been received, installed and validated, it is loaded into the active memory and becomes the operating software for the
Receiver.
EMMs
Access Control
Computer
MPEG-2
Streams
Software
Download
Controller
Download
Service
TANDBERG evolution 5000
Multiplexer
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 *
±
Control
70/140 MHz IF
TANDBERG
TANDBERG evolution 5000
Modulator
Up-converter and HPA
TANDBERG
TT1260 Receiver evolution 5000 nCompass Control
Figure 1.4: Typical Download Transmission System
Page 1-10 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Introduction
1.4 The Telco Receiver/Decoder
1.4.1
Local
Inputs
Typical Decoder System
The Decoder is a component of TANDBERG Television’s range of equipment. It is designed for use by broadcasters and distributors of video and audio services. It can be used as a transport stream monitor or to decode signals received over a telecommunications network. evolution 5000
Encoder (1)
TANDBERG
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 *
±
Ethernet evolution 5000
Encoder (2)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 *
± TANDBERG
Ethernet evolution 5000
Encoder (n)
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ± TANDBERG
Ethernet
Transport Stream
Processor
MPEG-2
Transport
Stream
TANDBERG
TANDBERG evolution 5000
Multiplexer (Main)
Ethernet
Control
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 *
± evolution 5000
Multiplexer (Standby)
Ethernet
Control
10BaseT evolution 5000 nCompass Control
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 * ±
TANDBERG
TANDBERG evolution 5000
Modulator (Main)
Ethernet
Control evolution 5000
Modulator (Standby)
Ethernet
Control
Ethernet Hub
Telecommunications
Network
TANDBERG
TT1260 Decoder
Ethernet
Control
Figure 1.5: Typical Compression System
The Decoder has the following inputs:
Two ASI copper interfaces for operation up to 160 Mbit/s for 188 byte packets and 160 Mbit/s for 204 byte packets.
The Telco receiver has a BNC connector for direct reception of TTV G.703 Telco packages over a PDH network.
NOTE…
For ATM AAL-1 E3 and ATM AAL-1 DS3 systems, two BNCs may be provided for full duplex operation.
1.4.3 What the Decoder Does
The ASI interfaces are used to present the transport stream in the format required by the internal Decoder circuitry. At this point, the operation of the unit is the same as the Satellite
Receiver.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 1-11
Introduction
The Decoder can be used to receive an input signal from a Public Telecom Network via a
Network Adapter Unit (NAU). No error correction is supported at the input of the unit so a level of Quality of Service should be negotiated with the Telecom Network Provider.
The Decoder is configured to select a single video service and other audio/data components from the multiple services on the incoming transport stream and present them at the output.
Incoming Transport Stream carried over a telecommunications network
TT1260 Decoder
Select a service from the incoming transport stream
Select the components from the selected service
Video
Audio
Data
Transport Stream
Multiple services on the incoming transport stream
Multiple components on the selected service
Figure 1.6: Role of the Decoder
1.5.1 Introduction
The TT1260 is designed for unattended operation. Once set up, the unit requires no further attention except to ensure the fan is working. There are up to four control modes associated with the Receiver (dependent upon options fitted). The unit remains in the chosen control mode until another mode is requested.
NOTE…
Local (Front Panel) Control is the factory default if TANDBERG Director is not installed.
1.5.2 Front Panel (Local) Modes
When operating the IRD from the Front Panel, there are two main operating modes: Navigate and Edit. See Section 3.3, Front Panel Operating Modes.
Timeout (5 minutes)
EDIT Off
EDIT
EDIT On
SAVE
Figure 1.7: Front Panel States
NAVIGATE
Page 1-12 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
1.5.3
Introduction
Remote Control Modes
RS-232/RS-485 Port
The unit enters this state when the RS232/RS485 REMOTE port receives a configuration change command or the Remote control mode is selected in the System (Menu 6); see Annex C, Menus. The baud-rate of the network control is dependent upon the selected protocol. Local commands are ignored when the unit is in Remote Control mode.
Network
The unit will operate in a similar manner when the Network port is enabled to receive SNMP commands. The TT1260 must have its IP Address and Subnet Mask configured to conform to the controlling network.
With the VideoGuard Conditional Access software installed and a valid Smart Card inserted, a
TT1260 Satellite Receiver can be put into Director NCP control mode.
NOTE…
Front Panel mode is the factory default for Receivers used in a TANDBERG DirectorV5 system. To switch to Director NCP mode refer to Section 3.9, Setting Up System Parameters.
All Front Panel and Serial Remote commands are ignored except the operating mode. The
TT1260 can be put into a local lockout condition. When in this condition, there are two ways to recover control:
•
Cancelling the local lockout using an over-air command.
•
Entering a PIN number to leave the operating mode of Director NCP. The PIN is defined in menu 4.5.3.
Either of these actions will put the Receiver out of local lockout mode.
1.6.1 Construction
The IRD is constructed using a screened self-ventilated modular system. All operational inputs and outputs are via rear-panel connectors. The unit may be operated freestanding or mounted in a 19-inch rack.
The physical interface for the Front Panel consists of an alphanumeric LCD display, pushbuttons, and status LEDs that are used to set up and monitor the unit. The general layout
is shown in Figure 1.8. Information on the use of these controls is given in Chapter 3,
Operating the Equipment Locally.
User input is via six pushbuttons comprising four cursor pushbuttons: Left, Right, Up, and
Down; and two edit control pushbuttons: Edit and Save.
Each pushbutton has an integral green LED except Save, which has an integral red LED.
When lit these LEDs indicate to the user which pushbutton is currently active.
Automatic repeat following an initial delay period is implemented for the Left, Right, Up, and
Down pushbuttons in software.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 1-13
Introduction
Alarm LED LCD display Edit Left Up
Figure 1.8: Front Panel Controls
Lock LED Save Down Right
1.6.4
1.6.5
Figure 1.8 shows the location of the LEDs on the front panel. The LEDs indicate the
equipment status as follows:
The red ALARM LED is used to indicate an IRD fault condition, e.g. a missing or faulty input signal. It should be off for correct operation, although it may be lit briefly during power up.
The green LOCK LED is used to indicate that the IRD is locked to a transport stream when lit, and indicates correct conditions and correct system functioning.
Bit Error Ratio Measurement
For satellite receivers, Bit Error Ratio (BER) measurement is done by an LCD display representation. See the Satellite menu (Annex C, Menus). C/N is also available in this way.
Conditional Access and Scrambling Options
TANDBERG DirectorV5
With the appropriate hardware option fitted, there is a slot on the rear panel to allow the insertion of a Conditional Access (CA) card for the TANDBERG DirectorV5 CA system.
Remote Authorisation System (RAS 1 and 2)
With the appropriate configuration, the TT1260 fully descrambles Remote Authorisation
System (RAS) input transport streams. The ability to decrypt all the components in any other transport stream is a function of the specific CA system decryption.
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS)
With the appropriate configuration, the TT1260 descrambles the BISS Mode 1 or Mode E input selected service. This system has been developed by the European Broadcasting Union
(EBU) as an open scrambling system.
BISS (as specified in EBU Tech 3292 May 2002) has five main levels of operation: Mode 0,
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3 and Mode E.
Signal Protection
With the appropriate configuration, the TT1260 fully descrambles Signal Protection input transport streams.
Page 1-14 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Introduction
DVB Common Interface
The TT1260 Common Interface version has a common interface (CI) slot at the rear.
The CI module has to be inserted first, before a card can be inserted.
Inputs and outputs to the unit are taken via the rear panel. Figure 1.9 shows a typical Decoder
rear panel.
Figure 1.9: TT1260 Decoder Rear Panel
Connector descriptions are given in Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment and Chapter 6,
Options.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 1-15
Introduction
BLANK
Page 1-16 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Chapter 2
2.
Installing the Equipment
Contents
Read This First!................................................. 2-3
Handling................................................. 2-3
Installing the Equipment......................... 2-3
Lifting ..................................................... 2-3
Site Requirements ................................. 2-3
Power Supplies ...................................... 2-3
Environment........................................... 2-3
Lightning Protection ............................... 2-3
Preliminary Checks ........................................... 2-4
Mechanical Inspection ........................... 2-4
Moving the Equipment Safely ................ 2-4
Installing the Equipment .................................... 2-5
Fixing ..................................................... 2-5
Ventilation .............................................. 2-5
Openings in the Covers ......................... 2-5
Care in Positioning................................. 2-5
Protection from Moisture........................ 2-5
Installing Cables - Safety ....................... 2-6
EMC Compliance Statements ........................... 2-6
EN 55022/AS/NZS 3548 ........................ 2-6
FCC ....................................................... 2-6
2.5
A.C. Supply Operating Voltage and Fusing -
Safety Information ............................................. 2-6
A.C. Power Supply Cord ........................ 2-7
General .................................................. 2-7
Wire Colours .......................................... 2-7
2.5.2
Connecting the Equipment to the A.C.
Power Supply....................................... 2-10
-48 Vdc Power Supply..................................... 2-10
D.C. Power Supply............................... 2-10
Location of the D.C. Input Connector... 2-10
2.6.3
Connecting the Equipment to the D.C.
Power Supply....................................... 2-10
Protective Earth/Technical Earth..................... 2-11
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Signal Connections .........................................2-12
General ................................................2-12
TT1260 Base Unit (TT1260/DIRBAS) ..2-14
Rear Panel View ..................................2-14
ASI Out ................................................2-14
Audio Outputs ......................................2-14
Connector ............................................2-14
Analogue Video Output ........................2-15
Digital Video Output .............................2-15
Frame Synchronisation ........................2-15
Ethernet/Web Browser/SNMP..............2-16
Remote Control ....................................2-16
Alarm Connector and Relay .................2-17
RS-232 Low-speed Asynchronous
Data Output..........................................2-17
Option Card Connectors..................................2-18
List of Figures
Figure 2.1: Air Flow through the Equipment ......................... 2-5
Figure 2.2: A.C. Power Inlet Assembly ................................. 2-7
Figure 2.3: Location of the Technical Earth ........................ 2-11
Figure 2.4: Typical Decoder Rear Panel............................. 2-12
Figure 2.5: TT1260 Signal Connections ............................. 2-13
Figure 2.6: Typical Decoder Rear Panel, with ASI Input
and Alarm Option Fitted ...................................... 2-14
Page 2-1
Installing the Equipment
List of Tables
Table 2.1: Fuse Information .................................................. 2-7
Table 2.2: Supply Cord Wiring Colours ................................. 2-7
Table 2.3: Non Standard Supply Cord Wire Colours .......... 2-10
Table 2.4: ASI Out Connector ............................................. 2-14
Table 2.5: Analogue Audio Connectors .............................. 2-14
Table 2.6: Analogue Output Connector............................... 2-15
Table 2.7: Digital Output Connector .................................... 2-15
Table 2.8: Frame Sync Hi-Z Connector .............................. 2-16
Table 2.9: Ethernet Pin-outs ............................................... 2-16
Table 2.10: Remote Control Connector .............................. 2-17
Table 2.11: Alarm Connector .............................................. 2-17
Table 2.12: RS-232 Low-speed Data Connector ................ 2-18
Page 2-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Installing the Equipment
2.1 Read This First!
2.1.1 Handling
The TT1260 must be handled and installed carefully and thoughtfully to prevent safety hazards and damage.
2.1.2 Installing the Equipment
Ensure the personnel designated to fit the unit have the appropriate skills and knowledge. If in any doubt, contact TANDBERG Television Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages for contact details).
Installation of the product should follow these instructions, and should only use installation accessories recommended by the manufacturers. When rack mounted, this equipment must have shelf supports as well as being fixed at the front panel.
Do not use this product as a support for any other equipment.
2.1.3 Lifting
Although this product only weighs approximately 4 kg (8.8 lb), in some circumstances it might be awkward to lift. In which case, do not attempt to lift or move it without proper assistance or equipment. If in doubt, seek assistance.
Power Supplies
See Annex B, Technical Specification for a full specification.
Environment
See Annex B, Technical Specification for a full specification.
Do not install this product in areas of high humidity or where there is danger of water ingress.
Lightning Protection
WARNING…
IF THE TT1260 DECODER HAS BEEN SUBJECT TO A LIGHTNING STRIKE OR POWER SURGE
WHICH HAS STOPPED IT WORKING, DISCONNECT THE POWER IMMEDIATELY. DO NOT
REAPPLY POWER UNTIL IT HAS BEEN CHECKED FOR SAFETY. IF IN DOUBT, CONTACT
TANDBERG TELEVISION CUSTOMER SERVICES.
Where appropriate, ensure this product has an adequate level of lightning protection.
Alternatively, during a lightning storm or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the supply outlet and disconnect the output equipment. This prevents damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution ReceiverTT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 2-3
Installing the Equipment
2.2 Preliminary Checks
2.2.2
WARNING…
REMOVING THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT MAY INVALIDATE ANY WARRANTIES, CAUSE A
SAFETY HAZARD OR/AND AFFECT THE EMC PERFORMANCE. CHECK WITH TANDBERG
TELEVISION CUSTOMER SERVICES.
Inspect the equipment for damage-in-transit. If in doubt, please contact TANDBERG
Television Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages).
Moving the Equipment Safely
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury and serious damage to the product.
Use only with a cart, stand, bracket or table recommended by TANDBERG
Television Ltd.
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn. Do not move or carry the equipment whilst it is still connected to the supply or other leads, is live, or is in operation.
Page 2-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Installing the Equipment
2.3 Installing the Equipment
2.3.1 Fixing
The TT1260 is designed for fixed use only and has been shipped with fixing brackets suitable for a standard 19-inch rack. When installed in a rack, it should be secured using the fixing brackets and M6 x 18 mm panhead screw in each corner of the front panel. In addition, support shelves must be used to reduce the weight on the brackets. Ensure it is firmly and safely located and it has an adequate flow of free-air.
A freestanding unit should be installed on a secure horizontal surface where it is unlikely to be knocked or its connectors and leads disturbed.
2.3.2 Ventilation
Openings in the Covers
Side openings in the cabinet, as well as a front-mounted cooling fan, are provided for ventilation.
They ensure reliable operation of the product and protect it from overheating. The openings or the fan must not be blocked or covered.
Air is released through vents at both sides of the unit.
Figure 2.1: Air Flow through the Equipment
Air is drawn into the interior by a front-mounted cooling fan.
Care in Positioning
CAUTIONS...
1. The fan contained within this unit is not fitted with a dust/insect filter. Pay attention to the environment in which it is to be used.
2. Do not install units so that the air intake of one aligns with the outlet on another. Provide baffles and adequate spacing.
The TT1260 should never be placed near or over a radiator or other source of heat. It should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a rack unless proper ventilation is provided and the instructions have been adhered to.
Allow at least 40 mm free air-space at each side of the equipment to ensure adequate cooling.
Racks containing stacked equipment may need to be forced air-cooled to reduce the ambient temperature within the rack.
Protection from Moisture
Do not install this equipment in areas of high humidity or where there is a danger of water ingress.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution ReceiverTT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 2-5
Installing the Equipment
2.3.3 Installing Cables - Safety
Power supply cables should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular attention to cables at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
Do not run a.c. power cables in the same duct as signal leads. Do not move or install equipment whilst it is still attached to the mains supply. Ensure safety and ESD precautions are observed whilst inter-connecting equipment.
2.4 EMC Compliance Statements
1
2.4.1 EN 55022/AS/NZS 3548
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
2.4.2 FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
2.5 A.C. Supply Operating Voltage and Fusing -
Safety Information
The TT1260 operates from a wide-ranging mains power supply (100-240 Vac 50/60 Hz nominal) and is designed for use in ambient air temperature in the range 0
°
C to +50
°
C. There are no links etc. to be altered for operation from different supply voltages. The full Technical
Specification is given in Annex B, Technical Specification.
WARNINGS…
1. THE TT1260 SHOULD ONLY BE OPERATED FROM THE TYPE OF POWER SOURCE
INDICATED ON THE MARKING LABEL. IF YOU ARE NOT SURE OF THE TYPE TO YOUR
BUSINESS, CONSULT YOUR APPLIANCE DEALER OR LOCAL POWER COMPANY. DO NOT
OVERLOAD WALL OUTLETS AND EXTENSION CORDS AS THIS CAN RESULT IN A RISK OF
FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK.
2. THE TT1260 RANGE OF RECEIVERS AND DECODERS ARE NOT FITTED WITH AN A.C.
POWER ON/OFF SWITCH. ENSURE THE SUPPLY SOCKET OUTLET IS INSTALLED OR
LOCATED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT SO THAT IT IS ACCESSIBLE.
1
The EMC information was correct at the time of manufacture. The EMC tests were performed with the Technical Earth attached.
Page 2-6 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Installing the Equipment
A.C. Power Inlet
2.5.1
Fuse Carrier To access the fuse, ease out the notch with a small flat-blade screwdriver.
Figure 2.2: A.C. Power Inlet Assembly
Table 2.1: Fuse Information
Item Specification
Fuse
Fuse type
Fuse rating
Single pole, fitted in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit.
5 mm x 20 mm anti-surge (T) HBC, IEC/EN 60127-2 Sheet 5
3.15 A
Fuse rated voltage 250 Vac
Power lead connector fuse (if appropriate) 5 A
NOTE...
See Annex B, Technical Specification for more fuse information.
A.C. Power Supply Cord
General
A two-metre mains supply cord is supplied with this product. It is fitted with a moulded plug suitable for the USA, UK or mainland Europe as advised at the time of ordering.
Wire Colours
The wires in the supply cord are coloured as shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2: Supply Cord Wiring Colours
UK (BS 1363) EUROPE (CEE 7/7) USA (NEMA 5-15P)
Neutral: Blue
Live: Brown
Blue
Brown
White
Black
If the colours do not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in a locally supplied plug, proceed as in
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution ReceiverTT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 2-7
Installing the Equipment
Page 2-8 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Installing the Equipment
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution ReceiverTT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 2-9
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.3: Non Standard Supply Cord Wire Colours
Wire Colour (UK) green-and-yellow blue brown
Action
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or the safety earth symbol or coloured green or green-and-yellow.
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured black.
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured red.
2.5.2 Connecting the Equipment to the A.C. Power Supply
As there is no mains power switch fitted to this unit, ensure the local a.c. power supply is switched OFF before connecting the supply cord.
Connect the mains lead to the TT1260 and then to the local supply.
2.6 -48 Supply
2.6.1 D.C. Power Supply
NOTE…
Only models TT1260/CIBAS/48 and TT1260/DIRBAS/48 use a 48 Vdc power supply.
2.6.2
2.6.3
CAUTION...
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your business, consult a qualified electrical engineer.
This product uses a –48 Vdc power supply source (see Annex B, Technical Specification for a full power supply specification).
Location of the D.C. Input Connector
The connector is located at the right-hand rear of the equipment.
WARNING…
THE –48 VDC. UNIT IS NOT FITTED WITH AN ON/OFF SWITCH. ENSURE THAT THE SUPPLY HAS
A SUITABLE MEANS OF ISOLATION WHICH IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE. FAILURE TO ISOLATE THE
EQUIPMENT PROPERLY MAY CAUSE A SAFETY HAZARD.
The equipment fuse is held in an integral fuse carrier at the d.c. power inlet at the rear of the
Receiver. See Annex B, Technical Specification for d.c. fuse information.
Connecting the Equipment to the D.C. Power Supply
Connect the Receiver to the local d.c. power supply as follows.
1. Local D.C. Power Supply
Ensure the power supply is isolated and switched off.
2. Receiver
Ensure the correct fuse type and rating has been fitted to both the equipment and the power cable.
Page 2-10 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Installing the Equipment
3. Supply Cord
Connect the d.c. lead to the Receiver input connector and then to the local d.c. power supply. Switch on the d.c. power supply.
2.7 Protective Earth/Technical Earth
The terminal marked at the rear panel is a Technical Earth. Its use is recommended. This is
NOT a protective earth for electric shock protection. The terminal is provided to:
1. Ensure all equipment chassis fixed within a rack are at the same technical earth potential.
To do this, connect a wire between the Technical Earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack
2. Eliminate the migration of stray charges when connecting between equipment.
The Technical Earth provides a suitable connection between the TT1260 and the installation to give a low impedance path at normal operating frequencies.
Location of the Technical Earth
Figure 2.3: Location of the Technical Earth
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution ReceiverTT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 2-11
Installing the Equipment
2.8.1 General
CAUTION...
It is strongly recommended that the terminal marked at the rear panel of the equipment is connected to a site Technical Earth before any external connections are made and the equipment is powered. This limits the migration of stray charges.
All signal connections are made via the rear panel. A typical rear panel is shown in
Figure 2.4. The connections are also shown schematically in Figure 2.5, and a full technical specification is given in Annex B.
The Receiver provides a flexible transport stream input interface. It is not a requirement for the equipment to support more than one optional input type in any one configuration.
The status information appropriate to each input type is available to the user via the User
Interface, and also via the remote control interfaces.
Figure 2.4: Typical Decoder Rear Panel
Page 2-12 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Installing the Equipment
Frame Synchronisation
RS-232/RS-485 Remote
Control
QPSK In
QPSK In
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM In
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM In
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM In
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM In
Ethernet
ASI In
ASI In
QPSK In
QPSK In
ASI In
ASI In
ATM
COFDM In
A.C. Mains Supply
TT1260 Professional Receiver
Motherboard (TT1260/DIRBAS)
ASI OUT 1
FRAME SYNC HI-Z
ASI OUT 2
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
CVBS 1
RS232/RS485
CVBS 2
SDI 1
SDI 2
RS232 DATA
ALARM
Alarm Relay Option Card
(TT1260/HDC/ALRM)
ALARM OPTION
QPSK Input Option Card
(TT1260/HWO/QPSK)
QPSK IN 1
QPSK IN 2
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM Option Card
(TT1260/HWO/HOM)
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM IN 1
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM IN 2
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM IN 3
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM IN 4
RJ-45
IP Input Option Card
(TT1260/HWO/IP)
ASI Input Option Card
(TT1260/HWO/ASI)
ASI IN 1
ASI IN 2
QP
QPSK IN 1
QPSK IN 2
ASI IN 1
ASI IN 2
Telco Input Option Card
(TT1260/HWO/G703,
TT1260/HWO/ATM-DS3,
TT1260/HWO/ATM-E3)
ATM In ATM Out
COFDM Input Option Card
(TT1260/COFDM678)
COFDM In 1
RS-422 Data Enabler Card
(TT1260/HWO/HSDATA)
DATA OUT
Power Supply Unit
Figure 2.5: TT1260 Signal Connections
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution ReceiverTT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
ASI Transport Streams
ASI Transport Streams
Analogue/Digital Audio Output
Analogue/Digital Audio Output
Analogue Video Output
Analogue Video Output
Digital Video Output
Digital Video Output
Low-speed Async Data
Alarms
Alarms
DS3 and E3 Only
High-speed Sync Data
Page 2-13
Installing the Equipment
2.8.2 TT1260 Base Unit (TT1260/DIRBAS)
Rear Panel View
Figure 2.6: Typical Decoder Rear Panel, with ASI Input and Alarm Option Fitted
Two BNC sockets output ASI Transport Streams with a maximum data rate of 160 Mbit/s.
Table 2.4: ASI Out Connector
Item Specification
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin-outs Centre
Shield
BNC 75 Ω socket
ASI OUT 1
ASI OUT 2
Video output
Ground/Chassis
Page 2-14
Connector
A pair of 9-way, male D-type connectors provide two stereo channels.
Each connector carries a single channel of a stereo pair in both analogue and digital form. The output can be varied according to service and unit configuration.
Audio control is through the Service Menu (Menu 3).
Table 2.5: Analogue Audio Connectors
Item Specification
Connector type 9-way, D-type, Male
Connector designations
Pin-outs
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
Pin 1 Digital audio +
Pin 2 Ground
Pin 3 Left +
Pin 4 Right +
Pin 5 Ground
Pin 6 Digital audio -
Pin 7 Ground
Pin 8 Left -
Pin 9 Right -
Nominal output impedance 50 Ω
Maximum data rate 3.072 Mbit/s
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Item Specification
Analogue Output level
Load impedance
+18 dBm nominal clipping level. Selectable in range 12 to +24 dBm.
≥ 600 Ω balanced
Analogue Video Output
This BNC socket provides the standard definition (SD) analogue output in the form of a composite video output. The output standard is configured using the Video Menu #3.1. The specification for these connectors are given in Section B.6.1, Video Outputs.
Table 2.6: Analogue Output Connector
Item Specification
Item Specification
Connector type BNC 75 Ω socket
Connector designation CVBS 1
CVBS 2
Pin-outs Centre
Shield
Video output
Ground/Chassis
Digital Video Output
The serial digital video output is routed in 4:2:2 format to an SDI output at 270 Mbit/s via BNC sockets. Video control is through the Video Menu
#3.1. The specification for these connectors are given in Section B.6.1,
Video Outputs.
Table 2.7: Digital Output Connector
Item Specification
Item Specification
Connector type BNC 75 Ω socket
Connector designation SDI 1
SDI 2
Pin-outs Centre
Shield
Video output
Ground/Chassis
Installing the Equipment
A BNC socket is used by the Decoder to frame lock to an external video source (NTSC or PAL). The frame information is input as a composite signal, with or without active video. The user can offset the synchronisation to the video output by ±8 lines of the reference signal, with a resolution of 1 pixel of the reference signal. Lip sync error introduced by the Receiver is in the range -10 ms to +30 ms. This implies audio frame skip and repeat may occur.
The video and audio can be synchronised to an analogue studio reference signal. This supports both 625 and 525 frame locking.
This Frame Sync is activated through the Service menu (Menu 3).
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution ReceiverTT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 2-15
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.8: Frame Sync Hi-Z Connector
Item Specification
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
BNC 75 Ω socket
FRAME SYNC
Analogue Black and Burst Input
Impedance Last unit must be terminated with 75 Ω
The TT1260 has an Ethernet remote control port for SNMP or XPO
Control. This is also used for high-speed data over Ethernet output and
TANDBERG engineering debug purposes.
Table 2.9: Ethernet Pin-outs
Item Specification
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin-outs
(Unused pins not connected)
RJ-45 (100BaseT)
10/100BaseT
Pin 1 Tx Out (+)
Pin 2 Tx Out (-)
Pin 3 Rx In (+)
Pin 6 Rx In (-)
Remote Control
Connect to a PC and use the System Menu 6.1.2 to switch between the RS-232 and RS-485 input standards.
The specification for this connector is given in Section B.6.4, Remote
Connector. The Remote Control Protocol is published in manual
ST.TS.E10100.
Page 2-16 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
2.8.7
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.10: Remote Control Connector
Item Specification
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin-outs
9-way, D-type, Male
RS232/RS485 REMOTE
3
4
1
2
Pin
7
8
5
6
9
Data Carrier Detected (DCD)
Receive Data (RxD)
Transmit Data (TxD)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
Ground
Data Set Ready (DSR)
Request to Send (RTS)
Clear to Send (CTS)
Not connected
Direction
Input
Input output output
— input output input
—
Alarm Connector and Relay
The alarm relay connector has a summary alarm relay. The summary relay is activated whenever the unit detects an alarm, or the power is switched off.
Pin
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
Table 2.11: Alarm Connector
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Rx
Ground
Not Tx
Tx
Not Rx
Not connected
Item Specification
Connector type
Connector designation
Pin-outs
Pin 4
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pins1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7
9-way, D-type, Female for the summary alarm relay
ALARM RELAY
Relay 1, common pin
Relay 1, Normally Closed (Open on Alarm)
Relay 1, Normally Open (Closed on Alarm)
Not used
RS-232 Low-speed Asynchronous Data Output
A 9-way, D-type female connector provides an asynchronous serial communications interface for the reception of low-speed data. The status of the data output on this connector is given in the
Data menu 3.4. The technical specification for this connector is given in Section B.6.3, Data Outputs.
NOTE…
Low-speed asynchronous data output is disabled when the High Speed RS-422 Data Enabler Card
(TT1260/HWO/HSDATA) is fitted.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution ReceiverTT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 2-17
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.12: RS-232 Low-speed Data Connector
Item Specification
Connector type
Connector designation
9-way, D-type, Female
RS232 DATA
Configuration DCE
Pin-outs Pin 1 Not used
Pin 2 Receive Data Output (RxD)
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 Not Used
Pin 5 Ground
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used
Pin 9 Not used
Option cards are described in Chapter 6, Options.
Page 2-18 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Chapter 3
3.
Operating the Equipment Locally
Contents
Powering the Equipment ................................... 3-3
Switching On.......................................... 3-3
Power Up Operating Modes................... 3-3
Front Panel Controls and Pushbuttons ............. 3-4
Front Panel Operating Modes ........................... 3-4
General .................................................. 3-4
Navigate Mode....................................... 3-4
Edit Mode............................................... 3-4
Using the Local Controls ................................... 3-6
LCD Menu Descriptions ......................... 3-6
Selecting a Menu Option........................ 3-6
Entering a Menu Value .......................... 3-6
Setting Up Preset Services (Menu 1) ................ 3-7
Using Preset Services............................ 3-7
Setting Up a Preset Service................... 3-7
Setting Up the Input (Menu 2) ........................... 3-7
Satellite Receiver ................................... 3-7
QPSK Satellite Receiver
(TT1260/HWO/QPSK) ........................... 3-7
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM Satellite
Receiver (TT1260/HWO/HOM) .............. 3-8
DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver
(TT1260/HWO/DVBS2,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C) ............ 3-9
DVB-S2 Input Option Card
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C ............. 3-9
3.6.2
Terrestrial Receiver
(TT1260/HWO/COFDM678) .................. 3-9
ATM Receiver ...................................... 3-10
TTV G.703 (TT1260/HWO/G703) ........ 3-10
10/100BaseT IP (TT1260/HWO/IP) ..... 3-11
Telco Receiver – DS3/E3
(TT1260/HWO/ATM-DS3,
TT1260/HWO/ATM-E3) ....................... 3-11
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Service Configuration (Menu 3).......................3-12
Selecting and Setting Up a Service......3-12
Selecting the Video Component...........3-12
Selecting the Audio Component...........3-13
Introduction ..........................................3-13
Selecting the Audio Manually ...............3-13
3.7.4
Setting Up Asynchronous Data
(RS-232) ..............................................3-14
3.7.5
Setting Up High-speed Synchronous
Data (RS-422) ......................................3-14
3.7.6
Setting Up High-speed Data over
Ethernet ...............................................3-15
Setting Up Teletext...............................3-15
3.7.8
Setting Up the Vertical Blanking
Interval (VBI) ........................................3-15
Setting the PCR PID Menu ..................3-16
Viewing the Network ID Menu ..............3-16
3.7.11
Setting Up MPEG4 Video De-
scrambling............................................3-17
3.7.12
Setting Up High Bitrate Service De-
scrambling............................................3-17
3.8
Setting Up the Conditional Access/Scrambling
(Menu 4)...........................................................3-18
Introduction ..........................................3-18
3.8.2
Remote Authorisation System (RAS)
(Menu 4.1)............................................3-18
3.8.3
TANDBERG Signal Protection (Menu
4.2).......................................................3-18
DVB Common Interface (Menu 4.3) .....3-18
3.8.5
TANDBERG DirectorV5 (Menu 4.4
and 4.5) ................................................3-19
3.8.6
Basic Interoperable Scrambling
System (BISS) (Menu 4.6) ...................3-19
3.9
Setting Up the Transport Stream Output
(Menu 4.8) .......................................................3-20
Set-up Procedure .................................3-20
Transport Stream Output .....................3-20
Page 3-1
Operating the Equipment Locally
ASI Output Mode..................................3-20
Setting Up the Alarms (Menu 5) ......................3-21
Setting Up System Parameters (Menu 6) ........3-22
Restarting the Unit...........................................3-23
Setting Up a Preset Service ............................3-23
List of Figures
Figure 3.1: Power Up Operating Mode..................................3-3
Figure 3.2: Front Panel Controls and Pushbuttons ...............3-4
List of Tables
Table 3.1: Navigate Mode .....................................................3-4
Table 3.2: Edit Mode .............................................................3-5
Table 3.3: Selecting a Menu Option ......................................3-6
Table 3.4: Entering a Menu Value .........................................3-6
Table 3.5: Setting Up a Preset Service .................................3-7
Table 3.6: Setting Up the QPSK Satellite Receiver...............3-7
Table 3.7: Setting Up the QPSK/8PSK/16QAM Satellite
Receiver.................................................................3-8
Table 3.8: Setting Up the DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver............3-9
Table 3.9: Tuning the Terrestrial Receiver ..........................3-10
Table 3.10: Setting Up the TTV G.703 interface .................3-10
Table 3.11: Setting Up the IP interface................................3-11
Table 3.12: Setting Up the DS3/E3 interface.......................3-11
Table 3.13: Selecting a Service ...........................................3-12
Table 3.14: Selecting the Video Component .......................3-12
Table 3.15: Manually Selecting the Audio Components......3-13
Table 3.16: Setting Up Async Data .....................................3-14
Table 3.17: Setting Up Synchronous High-speed Data.......3-15
Table 3.18: Setting Up High-speed Data over Ethernet ......3-15
Table 3.19: Setting Up Teletext ...........................................3-15
Table 3.20: Setting Up VBI ..................................................3-16
Table 3.21: Viewing the PCR PID Menu .............................3-16
Table 3.22: Viewing the Network ID Menu ..........................3-16
Table 3.23: Setting Up MPEG4 Video De-scrambling.........3-17
Table 3.24: Setting Up High Bitrate Service De-
scrambling ...........................................................3-17
Table 3.25: Setting Up the Conditional Access ...................3-19
Table 3.26: Setting Up the Transport Stream Output
(TSO) ...................................................................3-20
Table 3.27: Setting Up the Alarms (QPSK) .........................3-21
Table 3.28: Setting Up a System .........................................3-22
Table 3.29: Viewing the IRD Details Menu..........................3-22
Table 3.30: System Restart Menu .......................................3-23
Table 3.31: Setting up a Preset Service ..............................3-23
Page 3-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.1 Powering the Equipment
3.1.2
CAUTION...
This equipment should not be operated unless the cooling fan is working and there is free-air flow around the unit. Refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3.2 Ventilation.
Connect the signal inputs and a.c. power supply to the TT1260 and power up the unit. After a short period of initialisation and the TT1260 gaining lock, the unit powers up in Navigate mode. This is the usual operating condition.
The Lock LED will be on (green) when a signal is locked and off when unlocked.
See Figure 3.2 for the location of the Lock LED.
Power Up Operating Modes
TT1260 INITIALISING is displayed during power-up. The Alarm LED and Lock LED illuminate briefly
Power up
Yes
Is the
RIGHT button held in?
Alternate
Flash code is loaded
No
Initialisation
Show SERVICE Menu (#3)
Local
What was
Control Mode at
Power Off?
Remote
FRONT
PANEL
(LOCAL)
CONTROL
REMOTE
CONTROL
What was
Control Mode at
Power Off?
Network
NETWORK
CONTROL
NCP
LOCAL
LOCKOUT
NCP Command
Enter PIN
TANDBERG
DIRECTOR
NCP
CONTROL
Only available when
VideoGuard is installed and a valid
Smart Card inserted
Figure 3.1: Power Up Operating Mode
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-3
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.2 Front Panel Controls and Pushbuttons
Front Panel items are described under Section 1.6, Guided Tour.
Alarm LED LCD display Edit Left Up
Lock LED
Figure 3.2: Front Panel Controls and Pushbuttons
Save Down Right
3.3 Front Panel Operating Modes
3.3.1 General
There are two modes of front panel operation: Navigate Mode (see Section 3.3.2) and
Edit Mode (see Section 3.3.3).
Navigate mode allows the user to move between menus and pages within menus (editing the left display area).
Table 3.1: Navigate Mode
Action Result
Up Pushbutton Pressed
Down Pushbutton Pressed
Left Pushbutton Pressed
Right Pushbutton Pressed
Edit Pushbutton Pressed
Save Pushbutton Pressed
Go to page given by uplink of current page, obtain and display current data.
Go to page given by down link of current page, obtain and display current data.
Go to page given by left link of current page, obtain and display current data.
Go to page given by right link of current page, obtain and display current data.
Enter Edit mode at current page (if permitted else no effect).
No effect.
Pushbutton LEDs are updated to indicate which pushbutton presses are still valid as each navigation pushbutton press event is processed. For example, a lit Up pushbutton LED indicates there are pages above the current one.
Edit mode edits the right display area and allows the user to alter control parameters that define the TT1260 behaviour. To enter Edit mode press the Edit pushbutton when on a page containing an editable control parameter and the front panel is the controlling user interface.
Edit may be entered on some special pages at all times, for example on the page defining the controlling user interface.
Page 3-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
The Front Panel returns to Navigate mode when Edit is pressed again (abort edit with no save) or when Save is pressed (save modified parameter values). Processing of events from the front panel event queue depends on the current operating mode of the front panel.
Table 3.2: Edit Mode
Action Result
Up Pushbutton Pressed Increases value of current edit parameter by one unit.
Down Pushbutton Pressed Decreases value of current edit parameter by one unit.
Left Pushbutton Pressed Moves cursor one edit parameter/parameter digit left (making that the current edit parameter).
Right Pushbutton Pressed Moves cursor one edit parameter/parameter digit right (making that the current edit parameter).
Edit Pushbutton Pressed Aborts edit (no save/action of any modified parameters) and returns to Navigate mode, obtain and display current data.
Save Pushbutton Pressed Save/action new parameter values and returns to Navigate mode, obtain and display current data.
Pushbutton LEDs are updated to indicate which pushbutton presses are still valid as each edit pushbutton press event is processed. For example, when the Left pushbutton LED is lit it indicates there are additional editable parameters to the left of the current cursor position.
There is a maximum idle period of five minutes when Edit mode times out and returns to
Navigate mode.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-5
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.4 Using the Local Controls
3.4.2
3.4.3
Detailed LCD menu descriptions are given in Annex C, Menus. This chapter concentrates on describing the use of the menus for local operation.
Selecting a Menu Option
Some items shown in the right display area of the front panel LCD display have a set number of options. An example of this is the VIDEO TEST PATTERN (Menu 3.1.6) which has a number of preset Video Test Patterns associated with it. Use the following steps as a general guide to selecting an option.
Table 3.3: Selecting a Menu Option
Step Action
1
3
4
Select the menu and display the required selection.
Use the arrow pushbuttons to step through the options.
Press Save to store the option or press Edit to cancel the selection and return to the source menu.
Result
Normally there is only one selectable item. If there is more than one, use the Right and Left pushbuttons as described in
The Save button comes on to show that the new option can be stored.
This action scrolls through the options in a continuous loop.
Entering a Menu Value
Some items shown in the right display area of the front panel LCD display have a user-entered value. An example of this is the FSYNC PAL OFFSET (Menu 3.1.8) in which the frame sync offset for PAL has to be entered. Use the following steps as a general guide to entering a value.
Table 3.4: Entering a Menu Value
3
4
Step Action
1 Select the menu and display the required selection.
Use the Right or Left pushbutton to move the cursor to the required digit.
Change the value by using the arrow pushbuttons.
Result
The Save button will come on to show that the new value can be stored.
Each pushbutton has a built-in LED that turns on if the pushbutton function is appropriate to the displayed information.
Page 3-6 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
3.5 Setting Up Preset Services (Menu 1)
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.5.2
This group allows up to 40 Services to be stored as presets. Selecting a Service from the preset list in Menu 1 automatically reconfigures the TT1260 to receive that Service with its associated parameters set as stored.
Setting Up a Preset Service
Follow the steps in Table 3.5 to store the current Service as a preset.
Table 3.5: Setting Up a Preset Service
Step Action
1
2
Use the menus to set up the unit so that the required Service is current.
(Refer to Sections 3.5 and 3.6)
Go to Menu 1 to view the Preset menu.
3
Result
This selects the Service and associated parameters for the preset process.
Select a location to store the preset.
The EDIT mode cannot be entered unless a valid Service being decoded.
This displays the menu which allows the Current Service to be stored at a chosen location (01 – 40). If there is no Current
Service, the menu display reads NO STORED SERVICE.
Use Edit and the arrow pushbuttons to step through the stored items. This allows a specific location to be chosen. Any vacant locations are marked by NO STORED SERVICE.
This stores the current Service and its associated parameters as a preset in the selected location. This adds the Service to the list displayed on page 1.
3.6 Setting Up the Input (Menu 2)
QPSK Satellite Receiver (TT1260/HWO/QPSK)
Table 3.6: Setting Up the QPSK Satellite Receiver
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Go to Menu 2.2 and select SOURCE 1.
Result
The Receiver can take its signals from two sources. Select appropriate source.
This sets up the LNB frequency for the selected Source in MHz. Scroll to Menu 2.3. Enter the LNB
FREQUENCY then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.1. Enter the SATELLITE
FREQUENCY then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.2. Enter the SYMBOL
RATE then press Save.
This sets up the Satellite frequency for the selected Source in
MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for the selected Source in Msymbol/s.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-7
Operating the Equipment Locally
Step Action
5
6
7
8
9
Scroll to Menu 2.3.3. Enter the
MODULATION and FEC RATES then press
Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.4. Enter the LNB POWER and VOLTAGE settings then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.5. Enter the LNB 22 kHz setting then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.6. Enter the SEARCH
RANGE then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.2 and select SOURCE 2.
Repeat steps 2 through 8 using Menu 2.4.x.
Result
This sets up the Modulation (QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM) and FEC
(1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 8/9) rates for the selected Source. The
FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
Sets the LNB power for the selected Source (ON, OFF,
BOOSTED). BOOSTED provides 1V extra power over the ON setting. Also sets the LNB voltage settings
(18v – Horiz, 13v – Vert).
Enables or disables the LNB 22 kHz control tone for the selected
Source (On, Off).
This sets up the centre frequency Search Range for the selected
Source in kHz.
QPSK/8PSK/16QAM Satellite Receiver (TT1260/HWO/HOM)
Table 3.7: Setting Up the QPSK/8PSK/16QAM Satellite Receiver
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Go to Menu 2.2 and select SOURCE 1.
Result
The Receiver takes its signals from four sources. Select appropriate source.
This sets up the LNB frequency for the selected Source in MHz. Scroll down to Menu 2.3. Enter the LNB
FREQUENCY then press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 2.3.1. Enter the
SATELLITE FREQUENCY then press
Save.
Scroll down to Menu 2.3.2. Enter the
SYMBOL RATE then press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 2.3.3. Enter the
MODULATION and FEC RATES then press
Save.
Scroll down to Menu 2.3.8. Enter the LNB
22 kHz setting then press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 2.3.9. Enter the
SEARCH RANGE then press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 2.2 and select
SOURCE 2. Repeat steps 2 through 10.
This sets up the Satellite frequency for the selected Source in
MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for the selected Source in Msymbol/s.
This sets up the Modulation (QPSK, BPSK, 8PSK 1 , 16QAM 2 ) and
FEC (1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 8/9) rates for the selected Source.
The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
Sets the gain to HIGH/LOW Scroll down to Menu 2.3.4. Enter GAIN and then press Save.
Scroll to ROLL OFF. Enter the required setting and then press Save.
Scroll to SPECTRUM SENSE. Enter the required setting and then press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 2.3.7. Enter the LNB
POWER and VOLTAGE settings then press
Save.
Sets the roll off to 35 or 20%.
Sets the spectrum sense to NORMAL, INVERTED or AUTO.
Sets the LNB power for the selected Source (ON, OFF,
BOOSTED). BOOSTED provides 1V extra power over the ON setting. Also sets the LNB voltage settings
(18v – Horiz, 13v – Vert).
Enables or disables the LNB 22 kHz control tone for the selected
Source (On, Off).
This sets up the centre frequency Search Range for the selected
Source in kHz.
1
2
8PSK is a software option available by purchasing a license.
16QAM is a software option available by purchasing a license.
Page 3-8 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver
(TT1260/HWO/DVBS2, TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C)
Table 3.8: Setting Up the DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Result
Go to Menu 2.2 and select SOURCE 1. The Receiver can take its signals from four sources. Set up source 1.
This sets up the LNB frequency for the selected Source in MHz. Scroll to Menu 2.3 Enter the LNB
FREQUENCY then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.1 Enter the
SATELLITE FREQUENCY then press
Save.
This sets up the Satellite frequency for the selected Source in MHz.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.2 Enter the SYMBOL
RATE then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.3 Enter the DVB
Modulation Standard then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.4 Enter the ROLL OFF then press Save.
Sets the symbol rate for the selected Source in Msymbol/s.
This sets up the DVB modulation Standard (DVB-S or DVB-S2).
FEC detection is automatic. In DVB-S2 mode the demodulator automatically detects and locks to both QPSK and 8PSK constellations.
Sets the Roll Off of the demodulator Root Nyquist Filter. Choose between 35%, 25%, 20%. This value should match that set in the transmitting modulator.
This sets up the centre frequency Search Range for the selected
Source in kHz.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.5 Enter the SEARCH
RANGE then press Save.
Scroll to Menu 2.3.6 Enter the LNB
POWER and VOLTAGE settings then press Save.
Sets the LNB power for the selected Source (ON, OFF, BOOSTED).
BOOSTED provides 1V extra power over the ON setting. Also sets the LNB voltage settings (18v – Horiz, 13v – Vert).
Scroll to Menu 2.3.7 Enter the LNB
22 kHz setting then press Save.
Repeat steps 2 through 9 for input 2 to 4
Enables or disables the LNB 22 kHz control tone for the selected
Source (On, Off).
DVB-S2 Input Option Card TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C
The DVB-S2 demod option TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C offers three
L-band inputs plus an IF input. If this input option card is fitted in the receiver then note that
Menu 2.6 sets the IF input frequency. LNB Frequency, Satellite Frequency and LNB Power parameters are not applicable for this input.
The DVB-S2 demod option TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C also offers a constellation output in
DVB-S2 mode. This output can be enabled for each L-band/IF input from the menu 2.X.6.
Enabling this mode disables the demodulator transport stream rendering the receiver unable to decode a service.
3.6.2 Terrestrial Receiver (TT1260/HWO/COFDM678)
Table 3.9 steps through the set-up procedure of the Terrestrial Receiver using Menu 2 Input,
and the COFDM inputs. The transmission parameters must be known before starting.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-9
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 3.9: Tuning the Terrestrial Receiver
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Connect the cable to the COFDM input.
Power up the unit and navigate to Menu 2 Input.
Press the Right pushbutton to access Menu 2.1
Press the Down pushbutton to access Menu 2.2, then press Edit
Use the Up and Down pushbuttons to select RF input, then press Save.
Navigate to AUTO DETECT (Menu 2.2.4), then press Edit.
Select ENABLE, then press Save.
Navigate to FREQUENCY (Menu 2.3), then press Edit.
Enter the desired Satellite frequency in MHz, then press Save.
Navigate to CHANNEL SPACE (Menu 2.3.2), then press Edit.
Select the desired channel space (6, 7, 8 MHz), then press Save.
Navigate to HIERARCHY STREAM (Menu 2.4), then press Edit.
Enter the desired hierarchy stream, then press Save.
Return to Input Menu 2, it should display the current status. If status is NOT LOCKED, verify that the cable is properly connected and that all values have been entered correctly.
TTV G.703 (TT1260/HWO/G703)
Table 3.10 steps through the set up procedure of the ATM Receiver using
Menu 2 Input, and the TTV G.703 input.
Table 3.10: Setting Up the TTV G.703 interface
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Connect the cable to the TTV G.703 input.
Power up the unit and navigate to Menu 2 Input.
Press the Right pushbutton to access Menu 2.2
Navigate to INTERLEAVER (Menu 2.2.1), then press Edit
Select Enable or Disable, then press Save.
Navigate to SIGNAL LEVEL (Menu 2.2.2), then press Edit
Select Normal or Low, then press Save.
Navigate to AUTO DETECT (Menu 2.2.4), then press Edit.
Select ENABLE, then press Save.
Return to Input Menu 2, it should display the current status. If status is NOT LOCKED, verify that the cable is properly connected and that all values have been entered correctly.
Page 3-10 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
10/100BaseT IP (TT1260/HWO/IP)
Table 3.11 steps through the set up procedure of the Telco Receiver using
Menu 2 Input, and the IP input.
Table 3.11: Setting Up the IP interface
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Connect the Ethernet cable to the IP input connector.
Power up the unit and navigate to Menu 2 Input.
Navigate to UDP PORT (Menu 2.2), then press Edit
Select the Receive UDP Port number, then press Save.
Navigate to IP INPUT IP ADDRESS (Menu 2.2.1), then press Edit
Select the IP address, then press Save.
Navigate to IP INPUT SUBNET MASK (Menu 2.2.2), then press Edit.
Select the Subnet mask, then press Save.
Navigate to IP INPUT GATEWAY ADDRESS (Menu 2.2.3), then press Edit.
Select the Gateway address, then press Save.
Navigate to IP INPUT MULTICAST IP ADD (Menu 2.2.4), then press Edit.
Select the Multicast IP address, then press Save.
Return to Input Menu 2, it should display the current status. If status is NOT LOCKED, verify that the cable is properly connected and that all values have been entered correctly.
Telco Receiver – DS3/E3
(TT1260/HWO/ATM-DS3, TT1260/HWO/ATM-E3)
Table 3.12 steps through the set up procedure of the Telco Receiver using
Menu 2 Input, and the DS3 or E3 input.
Table 3.12: Setting Up the DS3/E3 interface
Step Action
1
2
3
4.
5
6
Result
Connect the cable to the DS3/E3 input.
Power up the unit and navigate to Menu 2
Input.
Accesses the Input menu.
Press the Right pushbutton then navigate to
Menu 2.2, Input Set up, then press Edit.
Set the required parameters, then press Save.
Sets the VPI, VCI and Enable/Disable the Payload Descrambling.
Press the Right pushbutton to access Menu
2.2.1 then press Edit.
Select Enable or Disable, then press Save.
Enable/Disable the Cell Discard and HEC Correction.
Press the Down pushbutton to access Menu
2.2.2 then press Edit.
Set the required parameter, then press Save.
Return to Input Menu 2, it should display the current status. If status is NOT LOCKED, verify that the cable is properly connected and that all values have been entered correctly.
Set the required Packet Length.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-11
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.7 Service Configuration (Menu 3)
3.7.1 Selecting and Setting Up a Service
Each Transport Stream may contain many Services. Menu 3 allows a Service to be chosen as current and the profile of its components to be specified. This Service will be used as the power up default Service until a new Service is selected.
3.7.2
Table 3.13: Selecting a Service
Step Action
1 Go to Menu 3 and select the required Service.
The Edit mode cannot be entered unless there are available Services.
2 Press
Result
This page shows the total number of Services available in the incoming Transport Stream. Use Edit and the arrow pushbuttons to select the required Service.
This stores the Service as the Current Service.
Selecting the Video Component
Table 3.14: Selecting the Video Component
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Go to Menu 3.1 and press Edit. Select one of the video streams or enter a video stream
PID.
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.4 and edit the 525 line video output coding (NTSC-M, PAL-M,
NTSC-M NP) and the 625 line video output coding (PAL-I, PAL-N, PAL-N CMB). Press
Save. Perform a system restart (see Section
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.5 and edit the parameter for setting the default video line standard (525 or 625) and the parameter for setting the response to loss of video (FREEZE
FRAME, BLACK FRAME, NO SYNCS). Press
Save. Perform a system restart
(see Section 3.12 Restarting the Unit).
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.6 and edit the video test pattern to be displayed. Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.1.7 and edit the parameter for framesync enable (ENABLED or
DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.1.8 and edit the PAL framesync offset range (-199999 to +199999 pixels) and the NTSC framesync offset range
(-199999 to +199999 pixels). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.9 and edit the parameter for setting the PTS Conformance
(STRICT (FS ADJUST), STRICT or
NORMAL). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.10 and edit the parameter for setting 4:2:0 delay (0-199 ms) or 4:2:2 delay (0-199 ms). Press Save.
Result
Selects the video component.
Edits the 525 line video output coding and the 625 line video output coding.
Edits the parameter for setting the default video line standard and the parameter for setting the response to loss of video.
Edits the video test pattern to be displayed.
Edits the parameter for framesync enable.
Edits the PAL framesync offset range and the NTSC framesync offset range.
Edits the parameter for setting the PTS Conformance.
Edits the parameter for setting 4:2:0 or 4:2:2 delay.
Page 3-12 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
3.7.3
Step Action
9
10
11
12
13
14
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.11 and edit the parameter for setting the video monitor aspect ratio (4:3, 16:9) and video output level
(70 – 130%). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.12 and edit the embedded audio data ID (0X0 – 0xFFF) and audio channel (NONE, ONE, TWO, or ONE and TWO). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.13 and edit the active
525 start line (line 22 or 23) and EDH
(ENABLED or DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.14 and edit the active format descriptor. Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.15 and edit the blank on video restart setting (ENABLED or
DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.1.16 and edit the 625 line 23 blank (ENABLED or DISABLED).
Press Save.
Result
Operating the Equipment Locally
Edits the parameter for setting the video monitor aspect ratio and video output level.
Edits the embedded audio data ID and audio channel.
Edit the first active video line (525) and the parameter for enabling EDH output.
Edit the active format descriptor.
Edit the setting to select blank on video restart.
Edit the active video line. (625)
Selecting the Audio Component
Introduction
Automatic audio component selection is based on component order in the PMT as follows:
•
Audio 1 selects the first component in the PMT and Audio 2 selects the second component.
•
Audio 1 does not select the same component as Audio 2 and vice-versa when component-PIDs are reordered in a new PMT.
•
Coding type and language are manually selectable through the User PID and type parameters.
Selecting the Audio Manually
It is possible to manually select any audio component from the active Service by using the front panel controls or via the remote control interface. Select one of the audio components in
the list or enter the correct PID. Table 3.15 describes the procedure for selecting a
component.
Table 3.15: Manually Selecting the Audio Components
Step Action
1
2
3
Go to the Menu 3.2 and press Edit. Select one of the audio streams or enter an audio
PID.
Scroll to Menu 3.2.2 and edit the Audio 1 delay adjustment (range ± 0 to 49.5ms).
Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.2.3 and edit the Audio 1 digital output format (AES3 or AC-3) and output routing (STEREO, MIXED TO BOTH,
LEFT TO BOTH, or RIGHT TO BOTH).
Press Save.
Result
Selects the audio component.
Edits the Audio 1 delay adjustment.
Edits the Audio 1 digital output format and output routing.
Note that when the input signal is STEREO, the Audio digital output format will always be STEREO.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-13
Operating the Equipment Locally
Step Action
4
5
6
Scroll to Menu 3.2.4 and edit the clipping value (12 – 24 dB). Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.2.5 and edit the
AC-3 downmix parameter (SURROUND
STEREO or CONVENTIONAL STEREO)
Press Save.
Go to the Menu 3.3 for Audio 2 and repeat steps 2 through 5.
Result
Edits the clipping value.
Edits the AC-3 downmix parameter.
Selects the audio component.
3.7.4 Setting Up Asynchronous Data (RS-232)
These menu pages allow status monitoring and configuration of the low-speed data.
NOTE…
When the High Speed RS-422 Data Enabler Card (S12595) is detected on power up the unit will recover high speed data (see Section 3.7.5). If it is not installed the unit will recover low speed data.
The unit can recover either low speed (RS-232) data or high speed (RS-422) data but not both
simultaneously.
Table 3.16: Setting Up Async Data
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Go to Menu 3.4 and press Edit. Select the data stream PID.
Scroll to Menu 3.4.1 and edit the low speed data output (ENABLED or
DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.4.2 and edit the baud rate (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 192000,
38400). Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.4.3 and edit the user sync data format (TTV#2, DVB). Press
Save.
Result
Selects the asynchronous data stream.
The unit receives and displays the correct bitrate.
The unit sets the baud rate.
The unit sets the user sync data format.
These menu pages allow status monitoring and configuration of the synchronous high-speed data.
NOTE…
When the High Speed RS-422 Data Enabler Card (S12595) is detected on power up the unit will
The unit can recover either low speed (RS-232) data or high speed (RS-422) data but not both
simultaneously.
Page 3-14 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 3.17: Setting Up Synchronous High-speed Data
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Go to Menu 3.4 and press Edit. Select the data stream PID.
Scroll to Menu 3.4.1 and edit the low speed data output (ENABLED or
DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.4.2 and edit the baud rate (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 192000,
38400). Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.4.3 and edit the user sync data format (TTV#2, DVB). Press
Save.
Result
Selects the synchronous data stream.
The unit receives and displays the correct bitrate.
The unit sets the baud rate.
The unit sets the user sync data format.
These menu pages allow status monitoring and configuration of the high-speed data over
Ethernet software option.
Table 3.18: Setting Up High-speed Data over Ethernet
Step Action
1 Go to Menu 3.5 and press Edit. Select the data stream PID.
2
3
Scroll to Menu 3.5.1 and edit the
High-speed data output (ENABLED or
DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll to Menu 3.5.3 and edit the Forward to
Gateway ON/OFF and the Gateway IP address menu. Press Save.
Result
Selects the data component.
The unit receives and displays the correct bitrate.
If the Forward to Gateway option is turned on, the unit will forward the data stream to the gateway address given.
3.7.8
The Teletext data is transmitted in Teletext PES packets. It uses its own PID to extract the
Teletext PES packets from the transport stream.
Table 3.19: Setting Up Teletext
Step Action
1
2
3
Go to Menu 3.6 and press Edit.
Scroll down to Menu 3.6.1 and edit the insertion status (ENABLED or DISABLED).
Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.6.2 and edit the PTS synchronisation (ENABLED or DISABLED).
Press Save.
Result
Selects the Teletext component.
Edits the insertion status.
Edits the PTS synchronisation.
Setting Up the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI)
The TT1260 is compliant with EN 300 472 and DVB TM 2304 for all the VBI formats stated in
Table 3.20. The TT1260 can handle VBI data transmitted as PES packets. It uses its own PID
to extract the VBI PES packets from the transport stream.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-15
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 3.20: Setting Up VBI
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Go to Menu 3.7 and select the VBI PID.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.1 and edit the parameter for enabling VPS insertion
(ENABLED or DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.2 and edit the parameter for enabling WSS insertion
(ENABLED or DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.3 and edit the parameter for enabling VITC insertion
(DISABLED/AUTO/PES/GOP). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.4 and edit the parameters for specifying the first and second insertion lines for 525 VITC, and edit the parameters for specifying the first and second insertion lines for 625 VITC.
Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.5 and edit the parameter for enabling Video Index insertion (ENABLED or DISABLED). Press
Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.6 and edit the parameter for enabling AMOL insertion
(ENABLED or DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.7 and edit the parameter for enabling Closed Captions insertion (ENABLED or DISABLED). Press
Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.8 and edit the parameter for enabling ITS insertion
(ENABLED (CCIR), ENABLED (FCC/UK) or
DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 3.7.9 and edit the parameter for enabling NTSC Pedestal insertion (ENABLED or DISABLED). Press
Save.
Result
Selects the VBI component.
Edits the parameter for enabling VPS pass through.
Edits the parameter for enabling WSS pass through.
Edits the parameter for enabling VITC pass through.
Edits the parameters for specifying the first and second insertion lines for 525 VITC, and the parameters for specifying the first and second insertion lines for 625 VITC.
Edits the parameter for enabling Video Index pass through.
Edits the parameter for enabling AMOL pass through.
Edits the parameter for enabling Closed Captions pass through.
Edits the parameter for enabling ITS insertion.
Edits the parameter for enabling NTSC Pedestal insertion.
3.7.9 Setting the PCR PID Menu
Table 3.21: Viewing the PCR PID Menu
Step Action
1 Go to Menu 3.8 and scroll down to USER
PID and edit the PID for enabling manual selection of the PCR PID.
Result
Gains access to the selection between automatically detected
PCR PID or manually entered PCR PID.
3.7.10 Viewing the Network ID Menu
Table 3.22: Viewing the Network ID Menu
Step Action
1 Go to Menu 3.9.
Result
Gains access to the Network ID and the Original Network ID.
Page 3-16 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.7.11 Setting Up MPEG4 Video De-scrambling
This feature allows the components in a scrambled service to be distributed as a clear service at the transport stream output. The IRD does not decode or process the MPEG-4 video component.
Table 3.23: Setting Up MPEG4 Video De-scrambling
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Go to Menu 3 and select the relevant service containing the MPEG4 video component.
Go to Menu 3.10 and check that the correct
MPEG4 video component PID has been found and that the status displays STOP.
Go to Menu 4 and confirm that the service or MPEG4 video is scrambled.
Go to Menu 4.8 and ensure that the
TRANSPORT STREAM OUTPUT setting is set to DECRYPTED.
Result
Selects the relevant service.
Displays the relevant component PID.
Confirms whether the component or service is scrambled.
De-scrambles the video component at the transport stream output.
3.7.12 Setting Up High Bitrate Service De-scrambling
This feature decrypts a single component at the highest possible bitrate (only available with
TANDBERG DirectorV5 using the TTVCA System). This feature supports a transport stream with a maximum bitrate of 70 Mbit/s. Therefore a bitrate of up to 66 Mbit/s should be available for the TTV Private Data Component - identified by unique stream ID (0xF2) - depending on the content of the transport stream.
Table 3.24: Setting Up High Bitrate Service De-scrambling
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Go to Menu 3 and select the relevant service containing the TTV Private Data component.
Go to Menu 3.10 and check that the correct
TTV Private Data component PID has been found and that the status displays STOP.
Go to Menu 4 and confirm that the service or Private Data component is scrambled.
Go to Menu 4.8 and ensure that the
TRANSPORT STREAM OUTPUT setting is set to DECRYPTED.
Result
Selects the relevant service.
Displays the relevant component PID.
Confirms whether the component or service is scrambled.
De-scrambles the Private Data component at the transport stream output.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-17
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.8 Setting Up the Conditional Access/Scrambling (Menu 4)
3.8.1 Introduction
Menu 4 allows the status and configuration of the Conditional Access (CA) module to be checked. The structure and content of this group depends on the CA system. The available
CA options are as follows:
•
No Conditional Access
•
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS), Mode 1 and Mode E only.
•
Remote Authorisation System (RAS 1 and RAS 2)
•
TANDBERG DirectorV5
•
DVB Common Interface
•
Provider Lock
BISS (as specified in EBU Tech 3292 May 2002) is standard on all units. It is not possible to have both DVB Common Interface and TANDBERG DirectorV5 on the same unit.
3.8.3
3.8.4
RAS has two levels of operation: FIXED KEY MODE and DSNG KEY MODE.
FIXED KEY MODE has a fixed control word to encrypt the data in the transport stream.
DSNG KEY MODE allows the user to specify the current session word so that it can be matched with a live DSNG transmission. In a RAS 2 system, each receiver needs to be enabled to decrypt the Transport Stream via the RAS II headend control system. Its main functionality is:
•
Over-air addressing of Receivers for authorisation/de-authorisation to decrypt the transmission.
•
Group operation for authorisation/de-authorisation.
•
Periodic control word changes during transmission.
Menu 4.1 allows fixed/DSNG selection and allows entry of the DSNG key.
TANDBERG Signal Protection (Menu 4.2)
The TT1260 can be enabled with TANDBERG Signal Protection, which is a non-smart card based signal protection system. Contact TANDBERG Television sales desk for more details.
Menu 4.2 allows this protection system to be enabled/disabled.
DVB Common Interface (Menu 4.3)
There is one slot on the rear of the unit, to allow the insertion of a DVB common interface (CI) conditional access module (CAM). This CAM module will host the Conditional Access (CA) card for the CA system. The CAM and the CA card needs to be manufactured to host the same CA system. Please contact TANDBERG Television sales desk for the recommended
CAM.
Page 3-18 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
3.8.5
3.8.6
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 3.25: Setting Up the Conditional Access
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Director
Units Only
Result
Go to Menu 4. Gains entry into the Conditional Access menu.
Scroll down to Menu 4.1 and edit the RAS mode (FIXED KEY MODE or DSNG KEY
MODE) and the DSNG key (7-digit number). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 4.2 and edit the Signal
Protection (ENABLED or DISABLED).
Press Save.
Edits the RAS mode and the DSNG key.
Edits the Signal Protection.
Edits the Videoguard Customer ID and the NCP Lock Override
Pin and the Reset Lock Override Pin.
Scroll down to Menu 4.3 and edit the
Videoguard Customer ID, the NCP Lock
Override Pin (4-digit number), and the
Reset Lock Override Pin (13-digit number).
Press Save.
4
CIF Units
Only
5 Edits the BISS mode and the session word.
6
7
Scroll down to Menu 4.6 and edit the BISS mode (1, E FIXED, E TTV, E USER ONE, or E USER TWO) and the session word
(12-digit number). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 4.6.1 and edit the session word for BISS E user ID One (14digit number) and the session word for
BISS E user ID Two (14-digit number).
Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 4.8 and edit the
Transport Stream Output (ENCRYPTED,
PARTIALLY DECRYPTED, or
DECRYPTED) Press Save.
Edits the session words for BISS E user ID One and user ID
Two.
Edits the Transport Stream Output.
TANDBERG DirectorV5 (Menu 4.4 and 4.5)
There is a single slot on the TT1260 rear panel to allow the insertion of a Smart Card for the
TANDBERG DirectorV5 system. The TANDBERG DirectorV5 system offers premium functionality including Conditional Access, Over-Air software download and Over-Air Control.
Please refer to the TANDBERG DirectorV5 user manual for more details.
Other than the insertion of the Smart Card, no specific set-up is required at the IRD for the
Conditional Access or software download. For over-air control (NCP) see Chapter 4,
Operating the Equipment Remotely.
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS) (Menu 4.6)
BISS Mode 1 is similar to RAS in that it uses a fixed control word to encrypt the data in the transport stream. Unlike RAS, the scrambling algorithm is non-proprietary, using the DVB
Common Scrambling Algorithm to allow interoperability with other manufacturers’ encoding/scrambling equipment.
Menu 4.6 allows selection of BISS Mode 1 or Mode E operation and allows the fixed key to be entered. Menus 4.6.1 and 4.6.2 allow user injected ids to be entered.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-19
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.9 Setting Up the Transport Stream Output (Menu 4.8)
Use Table 3.26 to step through the Transport Stream Output set up procedure using
Menu 4.8. This allows the transport stream for the current service to be output on the ASI output port.
Table 3.26: Setting Up the Transport Stream Output (TSO)
Step Action
1
2
Result
Go to Menu 4.8 to enter the TRANSPORT
STREAM OUTPUT setting.
Edits the Transport Stream Output.
Press EDIT then select one of the following:
ENCRYPTED (i.e. input transport stream);
PARTIALLY DECRYPTED (i.e. post TTV Signal
Protection and RAS);
The Transport Stream Output will be formatted according to the choice made.
DECRYPTED (i.e. post TTV, RAS, Common
Interface BISS, DIRECTOR)
The Transport Stream Output (TSO) is now set.
3.9.3
The Maximum input/output rates for each of the CA types are described in Annex B, Technical
Specification.
ASI Output Mode
•
Spread mode in = > spread mode out (except when the TSO is set to DECRYPTED in
step 2 in Table 3.26. Then the output is always bursted).
•
Burst mode in = > burst mode out.
Page 3-20 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.10 Setting Up the Alarms (Menu 5)
Menu 5 allows a selection of Alarms to be edited. Table 3.27 lists the alarm menus available
for the QPSK Satellite Receiver Option Card. The steps and menus given in the table will differ, depending on the input option card fitted.
Table 3.27: Setting Up the Alarms (QPSK)
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
Result
Go to Menu 5. Accesses the Alarms menu.
Scroll down to Menu 5.1 and edit the BIT
ERROR RATE range (9.9 E-1 to 1.0 E-8) and status (NO ALARM, SET ALARM ONLY, SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 – 6, SET RELAY
1 – 6 ONLY). Press Save.
Edits the BER alarms menu.
Scroll down to Menu 5.2 and edit the C/N
MARGIN menu (positive integer <100). Press
Save.
Scroll down to Menu 5.3 and edit the
TRANSPORT STREAM menu (NO ALARM,
SET ALARM ONLY, SET ALARM AND
RELAY 1 – 6, SET RELAY 1 – 6 ONLY).
Press Save.
Edits the C/N Margin alarms menu.
Edits the Transport Stream alarms menu.
Scroll down to Menu 5.4 and edit the VIDEO menu (NO ALARM, SET ALARM ONLY, SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 – 6, SET RELAY
1 – 6 ONLY). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 5.5 and edit the
AUDIO 1 menu (NO ALARM, SET ALARM
ONLY, SET ALARM AND RELAY 1 – 6, SET
RELAY 1 – 6 ONLY). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 5.6 and edit the
AUDIO 2 menu (NO ALARM, SET ALARM
ONLY, SET ALARM AND RELAY 1 – 6, SET
RELAY 1 – 6 ONLY). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 5.7 and edit the
PRE VETERBI BER menu
(9.9 E-1 to 1.0 E-8). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 5.7 and edit the
TEMP menu (NO ALARM, SET ALARM
ONLY, SET ALARM AND RELAY 1 – 6, SET
RELAY 1 – 6 ONLY). Press Save.
Edits the Video alarms menu.
Edits the Audio 1 alarms menu.
Edits the Audio 2 alarms menu.
Edits the PBER alarms menu.
Edits the Temperature alarms menu.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-21
Operating the Equipment Locally
3.11 Setting Up System Parameters (Menu 6)
This menu gives access to the Setup Menu to set up and edit System Parameters as well as the IRD Details menu.
Table 3.28: Setting Up a System
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Go to Menu 6.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1 and edit the
Operating Mode (FRONT PANEL, SERIAL
REMOTE, DIRECTOR NCP or NETWORK
(SNMP). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.1 and edit the LCD
Contrast (LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH). Press
Save.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.2 and edit the
SERIAL REMOTE PROTOCOL mode
(RS232 TTV, RS232 ALTEIA or RS485
ALTEIA)
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.3 and edit the IP
Address. Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.4 and edit the
Subnet Mask. Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.5 and edit the
Gateway address. Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.6 and edit the
Restore system defaults
(ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.7 and edit the
Service Hunt Mode (ENABLED or
DISABLED). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.8 and edit the Input
Stream SI Type (AUTO, FORCED ATSC or
FORCED DVB). Press Save.
Scroll down to Menu 6.1.9 and enter a
Customisation Key. Press Save.
Result
Accesses the System menu.
Edits the Operating Mode menu.
Edits the LCD Contrast.
Select the interface needed for serial remote control.
Edits the IP Address. Requires restart. User prompted with ‘Are you sure? Continue/Cancel’.
Edits the Subnet Mask. Requires restart. User prompted with ‘Are you sure? Continue/Cancel’.
Edits the Gateway address. Requires restart. User prompted with
‘Are you sure? Continue/Cancel’.
Edits the Restore System Defaults menu.
Edits the Service Hunt Mode menu.
Edits the Input Stream SI Type.
Edits the Customisation Key menu.
Table 3.29: Viewing the IRD Details Menu
Step Action
5
6
3
4
1
2
Go to Menu 6.2.
Scroll down to Menu 6.2.1.
Scroll down to Menu 6.2.2.
Scroll down to Menu 6.2.3.
Scroll down to Menu 6.2.4.
Scroll down to Menu 6.2.5.
Result
Accesses the IRD Details Menu and displays the Software Version.
Displays the Firmware Version.
Displays the Hardware Version.
Displays the PLD Version.
Displays the Electronic Serial Number.
Displays the Temperature.
Page 3-22 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
3.12 Restarting the Unit
The System Restart submenu allows the user to reboot the unit without having to remove and insert the power cable.
Table 3.30: System Restart Menu
Operating the Equipment Locally
Step Action
1 Go to Menu 6.3.
Result
Accesses the System Restart menu.
ACTIVATE will be displayed.
Unit is restarted. User prompted with ‘Are you sure?
Continue/Cancel’.
3.13 Setting Up a Preset Service
Follow the steps in the table below to store the current Service as a preset.
Table 3.31: Setting up a Preset Service
Step Action
1
2
Use the menus to set up the unit so that the required Service is current.
(Refer to Sections 3.5 and 3.6)
Go to Menu 1 to view the Preset menu.
3
Result
This selects the Service and associated parameters for the preset process.
Select a location to store the preset.
The EDIT mode cannot be entered unless a valid Service being decoded.
This displays the menu which allows the Current Service to be stored at a chosen location (01 – 40). If there is no Current
Service, the menu display reads NO STORED SERVICE.
Use Edit and the arrow pushbuttons to step through the stored items. This allows a specific location to be chosen. Any vacant locations are marked by NO STORED SERVICE.
This stores the current Service and its associated parameters as a preset in the selected location. This adds the Service to the list displayed on page 1.
NOTE…
It is not possible to store a service to a preset unless that service is being received (including all the required components such as video, audio, data, VBI, etc).
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 3-23
Operating the Equipment Locally
BLANK
Page 3-24 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Chapter 4
4.
Operating the Equipment Remotely
Contents
Remote Control ................................................. 4-3
Introduction ............................................ 4-3
4.1.2
Remote Protocol Control
Documentation....................................... 4-3
4.1.3
Configuring the Unit for Remote
Control via SNMP Port........................... 4-3
4.1.4
Configuring the Unit for Remote
Control via the Serial Remote Port ........ 4-3
4.1.5
Configuring the Unit for Remote
Control Over-air ..................................... 4-4
Overview................................................ 4-4
OAC Lockout ......................................... 4-4
Entering the OAC Lockout PIN .............. 4-5
Remote Control using a Web Browser... 4-5
Returning the Unit to Local Control Mode ......... 4-5
List of Tables
Table 4.1: Configuring the Serial Remote Port and
Activating Remote Protocol (SNMP)..................... 4-3
Table 4.2: Configuring the Serial Remote Port and
Activating Remote Protocol................................... 4-4
Table 4.3: Activating Director NCP Remote Control ............. 4-4
Table 4.4: Entering the OAC Lockout PIN ............................ 4-5
Table 4.5: Configuring the Unit for Local Control.................. 4-5
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 4-1
Operating the Equipment Remotely
BLANK
Page 4-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operating the Equipment Remotely
4.1.1 Introduction
The IRD can be remotely controlled in a variety of ways. The basic control methods are:
•
TANDBERG Device Controller (TDC)
•
Third-party application using TANDBERG SNMP MIB protocol
•
Third-party application using TANDBERG RS-232 control protocol
•
Third-party application using Alteia remote control protocol (RS-232/RS-485)
•
TANDBERG DirectorV5 (over-air)
•
Web Browser (XPO)
Common for all control methods is that the TT1260 needs to be set up to accept the remote control handling. Once in remote control mode, it cannot be locally controlled unless the remote control is deactivated.
4.1.3
4.1.4
The protocols used for remote control are in the TT1260 Remote Control Specification
ST.TS.E10100. This protocol is not described, or intended to be in the scope of this Reference
Guide.
For information about remote control protocols contact TANDBERG Television.
NOTE…
The remote control protocols are not contained as a part of the product. An additional license fee, NDA or other agreement with TANDBERG may be necessary to obtain the information required to control the product remotely.
Configuring the Unit for Remote Control via SNMP Port
For the unit to be controlled via the SNMP Ethernet port, the control mode of the TT1260 needs to be set to Network (SNMP).
Before attempting to enable Ethernet connection, ensure that valid network settings have been entered: IP address (Menu 6.1.3), subnet mask (Menu 6.1.4) and gateway address
(Menu 6.1.5).
Table 4.1: Configuring the Serial Remote Port and Activating Remote Protocol (SNMP)
Step Action
3. Press the down pushbutton and select
‘NETWORK (SNMP)’.
Result
Displays ‘OPERATING MODE’.
Displays ‘FRONT PANEL’.
The settings should be set to match the external control host.
The unit is ready for Remote Control.
Configuring the Unit for Remote Control via the Serial Remote
Port
For the unit to be controlled via RS-232 or RS-485, the control mode of the IRD needs to be set to Serial Remote and serial remote protocol must be chosen (RS-232, RS-232 Alteia or
RS-485 Alteia).
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 4-3
Operating the Equipment Remotely
Table 4.2: Configuring the Serial Remote Port and Activating Remote Protocol
Step Action Result
Displays ‘OPERATING MODE’
Displays ‘FRONT PANEL’
The settings should be set to match the external control host. 3. Press arrow down button and select
‘SERIAL REMOTE’
The unit is ready for Remote Control
Once the communication parameters are entered correctly, set the system into remote mode for the external computer to gain control of the unit:
Step Action
3. Chose between RS-232 TTV, RS-232
Alteia or RS-485 Alteia
Result
Displays ‘SERIAL REMOTE PROTOCOL’
Toggle between RS-232 TTV, RS-232 Alteia or RS-485 Alteia
The settings should be set to match the external control host.
The unit is ready for Remote Control
4.1.5 Configuring the Unit for Remote Control Over-air
Overview
For the unit to be controlled via over-air control (OAC), the control mode of the TT1260 needs to be set to Director NCP.
Table 4.3: Activating Director NCP Remote Control
Step Action
3.
Result to Displays ‘OPERATING MODE’.
Press the down pushbutton and select
‘DIRECTOR NCP’.
Displays ‘FRONT PANEL’.
The settings should be set to match the external control host.
The unit is ready for OAC. Requires restart. User prompted with
‘Are you sure? Continue/Cancel’.
OAC Lockout
Once the unit is in OAC control mode, it is possible for the remote control operator to issue a local lockout command to the Receiver. This will effectively deny the local user access to configuring the unit.
However, if a situation occurs whereby the local user needs to regain control over the unit, without a local lockout relinquish command being sent from the OAC control PC, a four digit
Personal Identification Number (PIN) may be entered using the front panel.
CAUTION…
TANDBERG Television Customer Services Help Desk will not be able to provide you with the Local lockout PIN, as it is uniquely created at the time of the lockout.
The user creates the PIN at lockout time. To obtain the PIN, please consult the person responsible for the administration of the unit.
Page 4-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
4.1.6
Operating the Equipment Remotely
Entering the OAC Lockout PIN
Table 4.4: Entering the OAC Lockout PIN
Step Action
3. Enter the four-digit PIN (as described in
Section 3.4.3) and press Save.
Result
Displays ‘NCP LOCK OVERRIDE PIN’.
Displays ‘ENTER CURRENT PIN’.
The unit is ready for local control.
Remote Control using a Web Browser
XPO provides a web page with a number of sub-pages. Each page maps to a function of the
TT1260. These pages contain drop-down menus or editable boxes which can be used to fully control the unit. Details of this control are beyond the scope of this Reference Guide. Contact
TANDBERG Customer Support for more information.
To access a web page:
1. Go to Menu 6.1.3, select a valid IP address for your network
2. Go to menu 6.1.4, select a valid subnet mask for your network.
3. Restart the unit.
Using a web browser, enter the IP address of the TT1260 as set up above.
4.2 Returning the Unit to Local Control Mode
Once the unit is in remote control mode, no local controls are available. To reacquire local control, it is necessary to set the remote control parameter back to Front Panel.
Table 4.5: Configuring the Unit for Local Control
Step Action Result
Displays ‘OPERATING MODE’.
3. Press the down pushbutton and select
‘FRONT PANEL’ and press Save.
Displays ‘SERIAL REMOTE’ or ‘DIRECTOR NCP’.
The unit is ready to be locally controlled.
If the unit is controlled via TANDBERG Director, a local lockout may be imposed. In this case, it is necessary to relinquish the lockout from the remote system, or to enter the local lockout
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 4-5
Operating the Equipment Remotely
BLANK
Page 4-6 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Chapter 5
5.
Alarms
Contents
Introduction ....................................................... 5-3
Location of the Alarm and Lock LEDs ............... 5-3
Alarm LED and Summary Relay ....................... 5-3
List of Figures
Figure 5.1: Front Panel LEDs ............................................... 5-3
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 5-1
Alarms
BLANK
Page 5-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Alarms
5.1 Introduction
There are two Front Panel LEDs that indicate the status of the TT1260. There is also one summary alarm relay and six additional alarm relays (optional). These are used to indicate abnormal performance of the unit.
5.2 Location of the Alarm and Lock LEDs
The red ALARM LED is used to indicate an equipment fault condition, for example a missing or faulty input signal. It should be off during correct operation, although it may be lit briefly during power-up.
The green LOCK LED is used to indicate that the equipment is locked to a transport stream when lit, and indicates correct conditions and correct system functioning.
Alarm LED
Figure 5.1: Front Panel LEDs
Lock LED
5.3 Alarm LED and Summary Relay
The TT1260 supports a summary alarm signal that is active when one or more of the individual monitored alarm conditions are active. It allows masking of unwanted alarm conditions so that they do not contribute to the summary alarm. Configuration of alarms is via the Front Panel and remote control interfaces. The state of the summary alarm is reflected by the Alarm LED on the front panel where red represents an alarm, and off represents no alarm.
The summary alarm relay is active when the alarm LED is active.
These indicators provide a high-level indication of an alarm within the unit. The alarm list depends on the unit model. The unit continuously monitors for the following alarm conditions during normal operation: (if not masked, see Menu 5, Annex C, Menus ):
•
No transport stream
•
Video not running
•
Audio 1 not running
•
Audio 2 not running
•
Temperature exceeding 65ºC
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 5-3
Alarms
It is possible to signal additional alarms depending on the Transport Stream, input type and optional functionality in the unit.
Satellite inputs:
•
Bit Error Rate (BER) above (programmable) threshold.
•
Modulation Error Ratio (MER) above (programmable) threshold (COFDM only).
•
C/N Margin above (programmable) threshold (COFDM only).
•
Pre-Viterbi Bit Error Rate (PBER) above (programmable) threshold (PBER only).
Page 5-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Chapter 6
6.
Options
Contents
Available Options .............................................. 6-3
Hardware Options .................................. 6-3
Software Options ................................... 6-4
Conditional Access ................................ 6-4
Hardware Enabled Options (Input Cards) ......... 6-5
ASI Input (TT1260/HWO/ASI) ................ 6-5
6.2.2
QPSK Input Card
(TT1260/HWO/QPSK) ........................... 6-5
General .................................................. 6-5
Connector Details - L-Band Inputs ......... 6-5
6.2.3
QPSK/ASI Input
(TT1260/HWO/QPSK/ASI)..................... 6-5
6.2.4
COFDM Input
(TT1260/HWO/COFDM678) .................. 6-6
6.2.5
TTV G.703 Input Card
(TT1260/HWO/G703)............................. 6-6
IP Input Card (TT1280/HWO/IP) ............ 6-6
6.2.7
ATM AAL-1 E3 Telco Input
(TT1260/HWO/ATM-E3) ........................ 6-7
6.2.8
ATM AAL-1 DS3 Telco Input
(TT1260/HWO/ATM-DS3)...................... 6-7
6.2.9
4 Input 16QAM/QPSK (TANDBERG)
Input (TT1260/HWO/HOM) .................... 6-7
6.2.10
Constellation Output
(TT1260/HWO/HOM/CONST) ............... 6-7
6.2.11
DVB-S2 Input
(TT1260/HWO/DVBS2,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C) ............ 6-7
PRO FEC (TT1260/IP/PROFEC) ........... 6-8
6.3
Hardware Enabled Options (Miscellaneous
Cards) ............................................................... 6-8
6.3.1
High Speed RS-422 Data Input
(TT1260/HWO/HSDATA)....................... 6-8
6.3.2
Alarm Relay Card
(TT1260/HDC/ALRM) ............................ 6-8
Software Enabled Options ................................ 6-9
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Licence Keys..........................................6-9
6.4.2
High Speed Data Over Ethernet
(TT1260/SWO/HSETHER).....................6-9
6.4.3
16QAM Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/16QAM)..........................6-9
6.4.4
8PSK Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/8PSK).............................6-9
4:2:0 Operation (TT1260/SWO/420) ......6-9
6.4.6
Low Symbol-rate Operation
(TT1260/SWO/LSYM) ............................6-9
6.4.7
SNMP Enabling
(TT1260/SWO/SNMP) ...........................6-9
6.4.8
DVB-S2 QPSK Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/DVBS2/QPSK) ...............6-9
6.4.9
DVB-S2 8PSK Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/DVBS2/8PSK) ..............6-10
6.4.10
DVB-S2 Low Symbol Rate Software
Licence
(TT1260/SWO/DVBS2/LSYM) .............6-10
6.4.11
Dolby AC-3 Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/DOLBY)........................6-10
6.4.12
PROFEC Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/IP/PROFEC) ................6-10
6.4.13
Audio Attenuation Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/AUD/NORM) ................6-10
6.4.14
XPO HTTP Password Software
Licence (TT1260/SWO/PW).................6-10
Conditional Access ..........................................6-10
6.5.1
RAS Mode 1 Conditional Access
(TT1260/SWO/RAS) ............................6-10
6.5.2
RAS Mode 2 Conditional Access
(TT1260/SWO/RAS2) ..........................6-10
6.5.3
BISS-1 and BISS-2
(TT1260/SWO/BISS)............................6-10
6.5.4
Director Functionality
(TT1260/SWO/DIR)..............................6-11
6.5.5
DirectorV5 Functionality
(TT1260/SWO/DIRV5) .........................6-11
6.5.6
Provider Lock
(TT1260/SWO/PROV/LOCK) ...............6-11
Page 6-1
Options
List of Figures
Figure 6.1: The Protocol Stack.............................................. 6-6
Figure 6.2: Building the Ethernet Frame ............................... 6-7
List of Tables
Table 6.1: Hardware Options (Input Cards)...........................6-3
Table 6.2: Hardware Options (Miscellaneous Cards)............6-3
Table 6.3: Software Options ..................................................6-4
Table 6.4: Conditional Access (CA).......................................6-4
Table 6.5: QPSK Satellite Receiver (L-band) Connector ......6-5
Table 6.6: Alarm Relay Card (TT1260/HWO/ALRM) Pin-
outs ........................................................................6-8
Page 6-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Options
These options require extra hardware to be fitted to the unit. Contact the Customer Services
Helpdesk for details (see Preliminary Pages).
There are two Mezzanine option slots and one Euroboard option slot. Mezzanine options card
may occupy one or two slots. Table 6.1 lists all the different types of option cards that are
supported in Release 4.0.0. An option card occupies two slots if both Mezzanine slots 1 and 2 are cross-marked.
Table 6.1: Hardware Options (Input Cards)
Marketing Code
TT1260/HWO/QPSK
TT1260/HWO/COFDM678
Description
QPSK demodulator input.
Switchable 6, 7 and 8 MHz input.
Mezzanine slot 1 slot 2
X
X
X
X
X
Euroboard slot
X
Max bitrate
(Mbit/s)
160
77.8
77.8/160
31.6
X
X
34
45
X
TT1260/HWO/ATM-DS3
TT1260/HWO/HOM
TT1260/HWO/HOM/CONST
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2
ATM AAL-1 DS3 Telco input.
4-input 16QAM/ QPSK
(TANDBERG) input.
Constellation Output.
4 L-band DVB-S, DVB-S2 (QPSK,
8PSK) inputs.
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI 3 L-band DVB-S, DVB-S2 (QPSK,
8PSK) and 2 ASI inputs.
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C 3 L-band DVB-S, DVB-S2 (QPSK,
8PSK) and 2 ASI inputs and constellation output.
TT1260/HWO/IP/PROFEC PRO MPEG FEC.
Table 6.2: Hardware Options (Miscellaneous Cards)
Marketing Code
TT1260/HWO/HSDATA
TT1260/HDC/ALRM
Description
High Speed RS-422 Data Enabler Card.
Additional Alarm Relay Card.
X 92
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 6-3
Options
Page 6-4
Table 6.3 list the purchasable software options for enhanced functionality.
Table 6.3: Software Options
Marketing Code Description
TT1260/SWO/HSETHER
TT1260/SWO/16QAM
TT1260/SWO/8PSK
TT1260/SWO/420
TT1260/SWO/LSYM
High speed Ethernet data output (data piping).
Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/HOM, enabling 16QAM.
Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/HOM, enabling 8PSK.
Allows only 4:2:0 operation.
Software key enabling low symbol rate operation down to 256 kSymbol/s for
TT1260/HWO/QPSK.
TT1260/SWO/SNMP Enable SNMP protocol for use with TANDBERG TDC and nCompass control systems.
TT1260/SWO/DVBS2/QPSK Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/DVBS2, TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/CNST enabling the DVB-S2 QPSK mode.
TT1260/SWO/DVBS2/8PSK
TT1260/SWO/DVBS2/LSYM
TT1260/SWO/DOLBY
TT1260/SWO/IP/PROFEC
Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/DVBS2, TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/CNST enabling the DVB-S2 8PSK mode. Also requires the
TT1260/SWO/DVBS2 QPSK licence key.
Software key enabling low symbol rate operation down to 1 MSymbol/s for DVBS2.
Software key enabling audio AC-3 operation.
Software key enabling PRO MPEG FEC for TT1260/HWO/IP/PROFEC.
TT1260/SWO/AUD/NORM
TT1260/SWO/PW
Software key enabling Audio Attenuation.
Software key enabling XPO HTTP Password Protection.
The transport stream received by the TT1260 may be encrypted. The CA system is used to decrypt the required components of the transport stream so that they can be decoded. At
Release 4.0.0, the receiver supports either DVB Common Interface or Smart Card based CA.
These are selectable on ordering.
All supported conditional access schemes are listed in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4: Conditional Access (CA)
Marketing Code Conditional Access
Scheme
Standard Max bitrate
(Mbit/s)
160 TT1260/SWO/SP TTV Signal Protection TANDBERG Television proprietary CA system
EM.RASTS.TE.S5870.4 TT1260/SWO/RAS RAS-1
TT1260/SWO/RAS2 RAS-2
TT1260/SWO/BISS
BISS-1
BISS-E
EBU standard Tech 2392
EBU standard Tech 2392
TT1260/SWO/DIR NDS Videoguard Director 4
TT1260/SWO/DIR5 NDS DirectorV5
160
60
60
60
60
60
Both CA smart cards and DVB Common Interface CA modules are accessible to the user at the rear of the receiver.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
Options
Hardware Enabled Options (Input Cards)
ASI Input (TT1260/HWO/ASI)
The ASI Input card supports ASI transport stream on two BNCs. The transport stream can be sourced from either input 1, input 2 or automatically sensed.
QPSK Input Card (TT1260/HWO/QPSK)
General
The QPSK Input Card supports QPSK demodulation for Satellite Receivers with two L-band inputs.
Connector Details - L-Band Inputs
Connect the L-band output of a suitable LNB to the F-type connector either directly or via a suitable attenuator giving adequate consideration to lightning and surge protection. The active input is chosen using the Input Status Menu (Menu #2).
In most cases an attenuator will not be required. The following list summarises the circumstances when one should be used.When the desired input level is greater than the specified maximum permissible (-25 dBm). When the downlead is a short length of low-loss cable and the LNB in use has a poor return loss (7 dB min).
When the Receiver is receiving one of many carriers in a multi-carrier FDM system and the level of the wanted signal is close to the specified maximum permissible.
The specification for this connector is given in Annex B, Technical Specification.
Table 6.5: QPSK Satellite Receiver (L-band) Connector
Input Specification
Connector Type
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
Shield
LNB Supply
F-type, Female
QPSK IN 1
QPSK IN 2
RF Input
Ground/Chassis
Refer to the next caution box
6.2.3
CAUTIONS…
1. The Receiver provides dc power (refer to Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment Locally) via the active
L-band input connector to drive an LNB (Low Noise Block Down-Converter). Do not connect equipment other than an LNB to this connector. Failure to do this may result in damage to the external equipment
2. The F-type connector is not suitable for repeated connection and disconnection. When intended for use in this way, fit a sacrificial connector and connect to it.
QPSK/ASI Input (TT1260/HWO/QPSK/ASI)
The QPSK/ASI input module provides two L-band F-type connector and two ASI transport stream BNC connector. For details please see ASI and QPSK sections.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 6-5
Options
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
COFDM Input (TT1260/HWO/COFDM678)
The COFDM digital terrestrial input card demodulates COFDM signals. The board is able to be used in all RF channel bandwidths (6, 7 and 8 MHz).
TTV G.703 Input Card (TT1260/HWO/G703)
The TTV G.703 input card receives a transport stream directly from a PDH network.
For technical specifications for the TTV G.703 card, see Annex B, Technical Specification.
IP Input Card (TT1280/HWO/IP)
The IP Input card provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port, on which a transport stream can be received in UDP packets at up to 60 Mbit/s.
The mapping of MPEG-2 TS packets into IP data frames is done according to the protocol
stack shown in Figure 6.1. The figure shows the Protocol Stack in use when mapping MPEG-2
into IP frames and Ethernet.
Control traffic for in-band management
(telnet, http, snmp)
TCP/UDP
MPEG-2 Transport Stream
(Multi-Program Transport
Stream or Single-Program
Transport Stream)
MPEG-2/DVB layer
UDP – User Datagram Protocol
Transport layer - IP
Link layer – 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Figure 6.1: The Protocol Stack
The MPEG-2/DVB layer is specified in ISO/IEC IS 13818 – Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Audio. The UDP layer is compliant with RFC768 – User Datagram Protocol. A configurable number of 188-byte MPEG-2 TS packets are mapped straight into a UDP frame with no additional overhead. The MTU for Ethernet is usually 1500 bytes. This limits the number of MPEG-2 TS packets per UDP frame to lie within one to seven.
The IP layer is according to RFC791 – Internet Protocol Specification.
Figure 6.2 shows a more detailed picture of the MPEG-2 data transfer. TS-packets are
mapped in a datagram, using User Data Protocol (UDP), Internet Protocol (IP) and Ethernet.
Page 6-6 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
Options
188
14H
20 H
Information
8 H
Information
Information
Figure 6.2: Building the Ethernet Frame
… 188 TS packets (1 to 7)
UDP datagram
IP datagram
Ethernet frame
ATM AAL-1 E3 Telco Input (TT1260/HWO/ATM-E3)
This provides transmission of MPEG-2 TS packets (respectively RS coded MPEG-2 TS packets) over PDH links using ATM cells, this particular version uses E3 style PDH framing.
ATM AAL-1 DS3 Telco Input (TT1260/HWO/ATM-DS3)
This provides transmission of MPEG-2 TS packets, respectively RS coded MPEG-2 TS packets, over PDH links using ATM cells, this particular version uses DS3 style PDH framing.
4 Input 16QAM/QPSK (TANDBERG) Input (TT1260/HWO/HOM)
The HOM Card is a 16QAM, 8PSK, QPSK, BPSK input module.
This card provides a complete digital front-end board for DVB-S, DSNG and other contribution applications and support 4 L-band inputs
The HOM card provides a method of receiving new code via the TT1260’s debug interface, this takes the form of an FTP download into the TT1260.
The 16QAM and 8PSK modes of operation are only available if purchased by the customer
(this takes the form of a customisation licence key).
A separate constellation output card is available to support the TT1260/HWO/HOM option, described above.
6.2.11 DVB-S2 Input
(TT1260/HWO/DVBS2, TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C)
The DVB-S2 Card is a DVB-S, QPSK and DVB-S2 QPSK, 8PSK input module.
This card provides a complete digital front-end board for DVB-S and
DVB-S2 contribution, distribution, DTH and DSNG applications.
The DVB-S2 options support 4 L-band inputs (TT1260/HWO/DVBS2) or
3 L-band inputs (TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI and TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C).
Two ASI inputs are provided with the TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI and
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C options.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 6-7
Options
An IF monitor BNC input is provided with the TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C option. This option also gives a constellation I and Q monitor output
1
. Enabling the constellation output mode disables the ability of the IRD to decode a service.
6.2.12 PRO FEC (TT1260/IP/PROFEC)
The Pro-MPEG Forward Error Correction (FEC) scheme is designed to recover lost or corrupted packets caused when transferring MPEG-2 transport streams, or newer MPEG standards encapsulated as MPEG-2 transport streams, over an IP network. The Pro-MPEG
FEC scheme has been implemented to the Pro-MPEG Code of Practice #3 release 2.
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
Hardware Enabled Options (Miscellaneous Cards)
High Speed RS-422 Data Input (TT1260/HWO/HSDATA)
High-speed data (synchronous data) can be carried in a transport stream as private data. This is then extracted from the transport stream and output from the IRD via an RS-422 interface or
Ethernet.
Alarm Relay Card (TT1260/HDC/ALRM)
The Alarm Relay Card has six additional relays. The alarm relays are programmable to reflect the state of one or more of the individual monitored alarm conditions. The relay card provides a 25-way, D-type connector at the rear of the unit.
NOTE…
Without this option, only the summary alarm is available.
Table 6.6: Alarm Relay Card (TT1260/HWO/ALRM) Pin-outs
Input Specification
Connector type
Connector designation
25-way D-type female
ALARM RELAY
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin-outs
Pin 1 Relay 1 – Normally Open (Closed on Alarm)
Pin 2
Pin 3
Relay 1 – Normally Closed (Open on Alarm)
Relay 2 – Common
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Relay 3 – Normally Open (Closed on Alarm)
Relay 3 – Normally Closed (Open on Alarm)
Relay 4 – Common
Relay 5 – Normally Open (Closed on Alarm)
Relay 5 – Normally Closed (Open on Alarm)
Relay 6 – Common
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
Relay 1 – Common
1
DVB-S2 mode only.
Page 6-8 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Options
Input Specification
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 21
Pin 22
Pin 23
Pin 24
Pin 25
Relay 2 – Normally Open (Closed on Alarm)
Relay 2 – Normally Closed (Open on Alarm)
Relay 3 – Common
Relay 4 – Normally Open (Closed on Alarm)
Relay 4 – Normally closed (Open on Alarm)
Relay 5 – Common
Relay 6 – Normally Open (Closed on Alarm)
Relay 6 – Normally Closed (Open on Alarm)
N/C
N/C
N/C
6.4 Software Enabled Options
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
These options may be enabled through software licence keys. Contact the Customer Services
Helpdesk for details (see Preliminary Pages).
High Speed Data Over Ethernet (TT1260/SWO/HSETHER)
The IRD can be enabled through a licence key to output high-speed data over the Ethernet port. The IRD uses the Data-Piping protocol to de-encapsulate the data received. The data must be carried as private data on a designated transport stream PID.
Careful consideration needs to be taken to ensure interoperability with the transmitting equipment.
16QAM Software Licence (TT1260/SWO/16QAM)
Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/HOM, enabling 16QAM.
8PSK Software Licence (TT1260/SWO/8PSK)
Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/HM, enabling 8PSK.
4:2:0 Operation (TT1260/SWO/420)
Allows only 4:2:0 operation.
Low Symbol-rate Operation (TT1260/SWO/LSYM)
Software key enabling low symbol-rate operation (down to 256 kSymbols/s) for QPSK Satellite
Receiver input card TT1260/HWO/QPSK.
Enable SNMP protocol for use with TANDBERG TDC and nCompass control systems.
Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/DVBS2, TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C enabling the DVB-S2 QPSK mode.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 6-9
Options
6.4.9 DVB-S2 8PSK Software Licence (TT1260/SWO/DVBS2/8PSK)
Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/DVBS2, TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C enabling the DVB-S2 8PSK mode. Also requires the
TT1260/SWO/DVBS2 QPSK licence key.
6.4.10 DVB-S2 Low Symbol Rate Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/DVBS2/LSYM)
Software key licence for TT1260/HWO/DVBS2, enabling low symbols rates down to
1 MSymbol/s.
6.4.11 Dolby AC-3 Software Licence (TT1260/SWO/DOLBY)
Software key licence enables Dolby audio AC-3 operation.
6.4.12 PROFEC Software Licence (TT1260/SWO/IP/PROFEC)
Software licence enables Pro-MPEG Forward Error Correction (FEC).
6.4.13 Audio Attenuation Software Licence
(TT1260/SWO/AUD/NORM)
Control is provided at the front panel or XPO interface for attenuation of the audio output levels. The control affects the audio level of the output from the decode process. Adjusting the control will affect both AES and analogue audio. Separate controls for each channel are provided. The control provides an attenuation range of 0 to 24 dB, in 2 dB steps. By default no attenuation is applied. Audio levels are non-volatile and will be re-applied after a power cycle.
In the event of restoring the unit to factory defaults, the attenuation value is reset to 0 dB.
6.4.14 XPO HTTP Password Software Licence (TT1260/SWO/PW)
XPO HTTP Password Protection can be enabled or disabled subject to a valid licence key.
When this feature is enabled, the user must specify a valid username and password to gain read/write access to the XPO interface. If no username and password are specified then the user is restricted to read-only access. When this feature is disabled, all users will have read/write access. The details are always defaulted when this licence is enabled. The default username and password is: username and password. When the password protection is in operation the user can change the username and password via the XPO interface. A separate username and password also exist for TDC (TANDBERG Device Controller).
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
RAS Mode 1 Conditional Access (TT1260/SWO/RAS)
This option enables RAS Mode 1 conditional access descrambling.
RAS Mode 2 Conditional Access (TT1260/SWO/RAS2)
This option enables RAS Mode 2 conditional access descrambling.
BISS-1 and BISS-2 (TT1260/SWO/BISS)
This option enables BISS functionality.
Page 6-10 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
6.5.4 Director Functionality (TT1260/SWO/DIR)
This option enables Director (Version 4) functionality.
6.5.6
This option enables Director (Version 5) functionality.
Provider Lock (TT1260/SWO/PROV/LOCK)
This option enables Provider Lock CA functionality.
Options
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 6-11
Options
BLANK
Page 6-12 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Chapter 7
7.
Preventative Maintenance and Fault- finding
Contents
Routine Checks................................................. 7-3
Cooling Fan ........................................... 7-3
Cleaning................................................. 7-3
Servicing ........................................................... 7-3
Conditions Requiring Servicing .............. 7-3
Replacement Parts ................................ 7-4
Checks on Completion of Servicing ....... 7-4
Maintenance and Support Services .................. 7-4
Introduction ............................................ 7-4
Warranty ................................................ 7-4
7.3.3
Levels of Continuing TANDBERG
Television Service Support .................... 7-4
Fault-finding ...................................................... 7-5
General .................................................. 7-5
Factory Default Settings......................... 7-5
Preliminary Investigations ...................... 7-5
Remote Control...................................... 7-5
Changing the Equipment Fuse.......................... 7-6
7.5.1
A.C. User Accessible Fuse
Replacement.......................................... 7-6
7.5.2
D.C. User Accessible Fuse
Replacement.......................................... 7-7
Disposal ............................................................ 7-8
Moulded Plugs ....................................... 7-8
Equipment.............................................. 7-8
List of Figures
Figure 7.1: Cooling Fan Location.......................................... 7-3
Figure 7.2: Fuse Carrier........................................................ 7-7
Figure 7.3: Position of Fuse Carrier for -48 Vdc Input .......... 7-7
List of Tables
Table 7.1: Fuse Information .................................................. 7-6
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 7-1
Preventative Maintenance and Fault-finding
BLANK
Page 7-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Preventative Maintenance and Fault-finding
There are no routine checks associated with this equipment other than to ensure that the unit is adequately cooled. This equipment must never be operated unless the cooling fan is working. This should be checked periodically.
CAUTION...
The fan contained within this unit is not fitted with an insect/dust filter. Pay particular attention to the environment in which it is going to be used.
Figure 7.1: Cooling Fan Location
Cooling Fan
7.1.2 Cleaning
Unplug the equipment from the supply before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.
Use a damp cloth for cleaning the exterior of the Receiver.
7.2 Servicing
7.2.1 Conditions Requiring Servicing
WARNING…
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THIS PRODUCT AS OPENING OR REMOVING COVERS MAY
EXPOSE DANGEROUS VOLTAGES OR OTHER HAZARDS. REFER ALL SERVICING TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL WHO HAVE BEEN AUTHORISED BY TANDBERG TELEVISION.
The following is a list of conditions that may indicate the need for servicing:
1. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.
2. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.
3. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
4. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation.
5. If the product has been dropped or the case has been damaged.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 7-3
Preventative Maintenance and Fault-finding
6. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
7. If the equipment has been subject to a lightning strike or power surge.
7.2.3
When replacement parts are required, be sure only parts specified by TANDBERG Television
Ltd (or having the same characteristics as the original part) have been used. Unauthorised substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
Checks on Completion of Servicing
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in a safe operating condition. Also, performance and EMC checks may be required.
7.3 Maintenance and Support Services
7.3.1 Introduction
TANDBERG Television is a leader in the design, integration and implementation of digital broadcasting products and systems. It has a large team dedicated to keeping our customers on-air 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
With regional offices worldwide, and ultra-modern specialist service facilities in the US, UK,
Hong Kong and Australia, TANDBERG Television covers the world. There is a customer service centre open round the clock, every day of the year, in your time zone.
TANDBERG’s years of design and support experience enable it to offer a range of service options that will meet your needs at a price that makes sense.
It’s called the TANDBERG Advantage.
7.3.2 Warranty
All TANDBERG Products and Systems are designed and built to the highest standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
7.3.3 Levels of Continuing TANDBERG Television Service
Support
For stand-alone equipment, then TANDBERG Television BASIC Advantage is the value for money choice for you.
BASIC provides you with year-by-year Service long after the warranty has expired.
For systems support you can choose either Gold or Silver Advantage. These packages are designed to save you costs and protect your income through enlisting the help of TANDBERG
Television support specialists.
Call TANDBERG Customer Services for more details.
Page 7-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Preventative Maintenance and Fault-finding
7.4 Fault-finding
7.4.1 General
The information contained in this chapter is intended to isolate the unit as the faulty equipment if a system failure occurs. If the following information fails to clear the abnormal condition, please contact Customer Services using the information given in the Preliminary Pages of this manual.
7.4.2 Factory Default Settings
TT1260 are dispatched with the factory defaults shown in Annex F. These can be restored at any time using System Menu (6).
1. Ensure all leads and connectors are in place and serviceable.
2. Ensure the unit is powered. If not investigate the power source.
Check the fuse.
3. Ensure the red alarm LED on the front of the unit is not lit. If it is, investigate the Alarm status (see Chapter 5, Alarms).
4. Use the BER display to ensure that the Post Viterbi BER is less than 2.0 E-4 (refer to
Annex C, Menus). If it is not, check the input to the Receiver.
The TT1260 remote control input operates with RS-232, RS-485 serial data formats
(Menu 6.1.2) and SNMP web page Ethernet format.
CAUTION…
Be sure to set the correct format and address via the front panel before attempting to use this input. The
TT1260 will ignore any remote control commands if the input is not correctly set.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 7-5
Preventative Maintenance and Fault-finding
7.5 Changing the Equipment Fuse
7.5.1 A.C. User Accessible Fuse Replacement
CAUTION...
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home or business, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
The power supply used in this equipment is a wide-ranging, a.c. power supply unit designed for use in ambient air temperature conditions of 0
°
C to +50
°
C for 100-240 Vac, 50-60 Hz (see
Annex B, Technical Specification for details). There are no links or switches to be altered for operation from different a.c. supplies.
The TT1260 is designed for User Accessible Fuse Replacement.
In addition to the fuse in the supply cable plug (if appropriate) there is a fuse held in an integral fuse carrier at the a.c. power inlet at the rear of the unit.
Table 7.1: Fuse Information
Item Specification
Fuse
Fuse type
Fuse rating
Single pole, fitted in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit.
5 mm x 20 mm anti-surge (T) HBC, IEC/EN 60127-2 Sheet 5
3.15 A, 250 Vac
To replace the a.c. power fuse perform the following:
WARNING…
BEFORE REPLACING THE REAR PANEL FUSE, DISCONNECT THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE
SUPPLY. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY EXPOSE HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES. UNPLUG THE
EQUIPMENT FROM THE LOCAL SUPPLY SOCKET.
1. Ensure that power is turned off and the power cable is disconnected from the a.c. power inlet.
2. Ease out the fuse carrier by placing a small, flat-bladed screwdriver in the notches at the sides of the carrier.
CAUTION...
When replacing the power input fuse, always ensure that a fuse of the correct type and rating is fitted.
Failure to do so results in inadequate protection.
3. Replace the fuse in the carrier.
4. Insert the fuse carrier back in the a.c. power inlet.
Page 7-6 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Preventative Maintenance and Fault-finding
A.C. Power Inlet
7.5.2
Fuse Carrier To access the fuse, ease out the notch with a small flat-blade screwdriver.
Figure 7.2: Fuse Carrier
If the replacement fuse also blows, do not continue. Disconnect the equipment and contact
TANDBERG Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages) for advice.
D.C. User Accessible Fuse Replacement
WARNING…
BEFORE REPLACING THE REAR PANEL FUSE, ISOLATE THE UNIT FROM THE SUPPLY.
FAILURE TO ISOLATE THE EQUIPMENT PROPERLY MAY CAUSE A SAFETY HAZARD.
NOTE…
Refer to Annex B, Technical Specification for information about the d.c. fuse.
To replace the d.c. power fuse:
1. Ensure that d.c. power is turned off or the power cable is disconnected from the power inlet.
2.
Unscrew the fuse carrier and remove the old fuse (see Figure 7.3).
CAUTION...
When replacing the power input fuse, always ensure that a fuse of the correct type and rating, is fitted.
Failure to do so results in inadequate protection.
3. Insert the new fuse in the carrier.
4. Insert the fuse carrier back in the d.c. power inlet.
Fuse Carrier
Figure 7.3: Position of Fuse Carrier for -48 Vdc Input
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page 7-7
Preventative Maintenance and Fault-finding
7.6 Disposal
If the moulded plug fitted to the mains cable supplied with this equipment is not required, use another cable. If the supplied plug is to be changed, cut it off and dispose of it safely.
WARNING...
IF THE MOULDED PLUG FITTED TO THE MAINS CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT IS
NOT REQUIRED, PLEASE CUT IT OFF AND DISPOSE OF IT SAFELY. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY
ENDANGER LIFE AS LIVE ENDS MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE REMOVED PLUG IS INSERTED INTO
A MAINS OUTLET.
7.6.2 Equipment
Dispose of this equipment safely at the end of its life. Local codes and/or environmental restrictions may affect its disposal. Check with your local authority.
Page 7-8 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Annex A
A.
Glossary
The following list covers most of the abbreviations, acronyms and terms as used in TANDBERG Television
Limited Manuals, User and Reference Guides. All terms may not be included in this Reference Guide.
µ
m Micrometre (former name - micron): a unit of length equal to one millionth (10
-6
) of a metre.
3:2 pulldown A technique used when converting film material (which operates at 24 pictures per second) to
525-line video (operating at 30 pictures per second).
4:2:0
4:2:2
422P@ML
Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on alternate lines at half the luminance rate.
Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on all lines at half the luminance rate.
422 Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 50 Mbit/s over various mediums.
Used for Contribution and Distribution applications.
5B6B 5 Binary Bits Encoded to 6 Binary Bits: Block code.
ADPCM
ADT
AFC
AFS
AGC
AMOL I and II
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An advanced PCM technique that converts analogue sound into digital data and vice versa. Instead of coding an absolute measurement at each sample point, it codes the difference between samples and can dynamically switch the coding scale to compensate for variations in amplitude and frequency.
Audio, Data And Teletext.
Automatic Frequency Control.
Automation File Server.
Automatic Gain Control.
Automatic Measure of Line-ups I and II: Used by automated equipment to measure programme-viewing ratings.
ASI
ASIC
Asynchronous Serial Interface.
Application-Specific Integrated Circuit: A customised chip designed to perform a specific function.
Async Asynchronous.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page A-1
Glossary
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode: A connection orientated, cell based, data transport technology designed for Broadband ISDN (B-ISDN). It provides a circuit-switched bandwidthon-demand carrier system, with the flexibility of packet switching. It offers low end-to-end delays and (negotiable on call set up) Quality of Service guarantees. Asynchronous refers to the sporadic nature of the data being transmitted. Cells are transmitted only when data is to be sent, therefore the time interval between cells varies according to the availability of data.
B3ZS and develop a digital TV standard for the U.S.A. In late 1996, the FCC adopted the ATSC standard, the digital counterpart of the NTSC standard.
Bipolar with Three Zero Substitution: A method of eliminating long zero strings in a transmission. It is used to ensure a sufficient number of transitions to maintain system synchronisation when the user data stream contains an insufficient number of 1s to do so.
B3ZS is the North American equivalent of the European HDB3.
Refers to hardware or software that is compatible with earlier versions. Backward
Compatibility
BAT baud rate
BER
BISS
Bitrate
Block; Pixel Block
Bouquet Association Table: Part of the service information data. The BAT provides information about bouquets. It gives the name of the bouquet and a list of associated services.
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises information symbols that may consist of a number of possible states. Equivalent to bitrate when the symbols only have two states (1 and 0). Measured in Baud.
Bit Error Rate: A measure of transmission quality. The rate at which errors occur in the transmission of data bits over a link. It is generally shown as a negative exponent, (e.g., 10
-7 means that 1 in 10,000,000 bits are in error).
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System: Non-proprietary encryption from EBU (Tech3290).
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises two logic states, 1 and 0.
Measured in bit/s.
An 8-row by 8-column matrix of luminance sample values, or 64 DCT coefficients (source, quantised, or dequantised).
Bouquet
B-Picture; B-Frame
A collection of services (TV, radio, and data, or any combination of the three) grouped and sold together, and identified in the SI as a group. A single service may be in several bouquets.
Bi-directionally Predictive Coded Picture/Frame: A picture that is coded using motioncompensated prediction from previous I or P frames (forward prediction) and/or future I or P frames (backward prediction). B frames are not used in any prediction.
Binary Phase Shift Keying: A data modulation technique. BPSK
Buffer A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.
BW Bandwidth: The transmission capacity of an electronic line such as (among others) a communications network, computer bus, or broadcast link. It is expressed in bits per second, bytes per second or in Hertz (cycles per second). When expressed in Hertz, the frequency may be a greater number than the actual bits per second, because the bandwidth is the difference between the lowest and highest frequencies transmitted. High bandwidth allows fast transmission or high-volume transmission.
Byte-mode Each byte is delivered separately in the ASI Transport Stream, with stuffing data added between the Bytes to increase the data rate to 270 Mbit/s. See DVB Document A010 rev. 1,
Section B3.3, (ASI) Layer-2 Transport Protocol.
CA
CAT
Conditional Access: The technology used to control the access to viewing services to authorised subscribers through the transmission of encrypted signals and the programmable regulation of their decryption by a system such as viewing cards.
Conditional Access Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data.
Mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance if CA is in use.
Page A-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Glossary
C-Band
CCIR
CCITT
Channel
Channel Coding
Chrominance
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the frequency range of approximately 4 GHz to 6 GHz. Used by communications satellites. Preferred in tropical climates because it is not susceptible to fading.
See:
ITU-R.
See:
ITU-T.
A narrow range of frequencies, part of a frequency band, for the transmission of radio and television signals without interference from other channels.
In the case of OFDM, a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies are allocated to a channel.
A way of encoding data in a communications channel that adds patterns of redundancy into the transmission path in order to improve the error rate. Such methods are widely used in wireless communications.
The colour part of a TV picture signal, relating to the hue and saturation but not to the luminance (brightness) of the signal. In a composite-coded colour system, the colour information (chrominance, often referred to as chroma) is modulated onto a high frequency carrier and added to the monochrome-format video signal carrying the luminance (Y). In a
component-coded colour system, the two colour-difference signals (R-Y)(B-Y) usually referred to as C
R
C
B
(digital) or P
R
P
B
(analogue), are used to convey colour information. When
C
R
C
B
(P
R
P
B
) is added to the luminance (Y), the complete picture information is conveyed as
YC
R
C
B
(YP
R
P
B
).
A TV picture subtitling system used with 525-line analogue transmissions. Closed Captioning
CODE
Codec
COFDM
Composite
Compression
Create Once Distribute Everywhere.
The combination of an Encoder and a complementary Decoder located respectively at the input and output of a transmission path.
Coded OFDM: COFDM adds forward error correction to the OFDM transmission consisting of
Reed-Solomon (RS) coding followed by convolutional coding to add extra bits to the transmitted signal. This allows a large number of errors at the receive end to be corrected by convolutional (Viterbi) decoding followed by RS decoding.
CVBS Video Signal, 1 V pk-pk
Reduction in the number of bits used to represent the same information. For the purposes of a broadcast system, it is the process of reducing digital picture information by discarding redundant portions of information that are not required when reconstituting the picture to produce viewing clarity. Compression allows a higher bite-rate to be transmitted through a given bandwidth.
Compression System Responsible for compressing and multiplexing the video / audio / data bitstreams, together with the authorisation stream. The multiplexed data stream is then ready for transmission.
C
R
C
B
Digital Colour difference signals. These signals, in combination with the luminance signal (Y), define the colour and brightness of each picture element (pixel) on a TV line.
See:
Chrominance
CRC
CVBS
Cyclic Redundancy Check: A mathematical algorithm that computes a numerical value based on the bits in a block of data. This number is transmitted with the data and the receiver uses this information and the same algorithm to ensure the accurate delivery of data by comparing the results of algorithm and the number received. If a mismatch occurs, an error in transmission is presumed.
Colour Video Black Sync Signal dB Decibels: A ratio of one quantity to another using logarithmic scales to give results related to human aural or visual perception. dB is a ratio whereas dBm, for example, is an absolute value, quoted as a ratio to a fixed point of 0 dBm. 0 dBm is 1 mW at 1 kHz terminated in
600 . 0 dBmV is 1 mV terminated in 75 .
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page A-3
Glossary
DCE
DCT
DDS
Data Communications Equipment: Typically a modem. It establishes, maintains and terminates a session on a network but in itself is not the source (originator) or destination (end receiving unit) of signals (e.g. a computer, see DTE). A DCE device may also convert signals to comply with the transmission path (network) format.
Discrete Cosine Transform: A technique for expressing a waveform as a weighted sum of cosines. Raw video data is not readily compressible. DCT is not in itself a compression technique but is used to process the video data so that it is compressible by an encoder. DCT processes the picture on an 8x8-pixel block basis, converting the data from an uncompressible X Y form (as displayed by an oscilloscope) to a compressible frequency domain form (as displayed by a spectrum analyser). Can be forward DCT or inverse DCT.
Direct Digital Synthesiser.
Decoder The unit containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode encrypted signals. Some
Decoders are separate from the receiver but in satellite TV broadcasting, the term is often used interchangeably as a name for an Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD). The term IRD, or
IRD / Decoder, is usually associated with satellite TV broadcasting while Cable systems are based on Converters or on Set-Top Boxes / Converters.
Decoding Time stamp A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time that an access unit is to be decoded in the system target Decoder.
DENG Digital Electronic News Gathering
Differential Coding
DIN
Downlink
Downconvert
DPCM
DSNG
Method of coding using the difference between the value of a sample and a predicted value. circuit
s
. The pins hang vertically from the two long sides of the rectangular package, spaced at intervals of 0.1 inch.
Deutsches Institut für Normung: German Standards Institute.
The part of the satellite communications circuit that extends from the satellite to an Earth station.
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a lower frequency range.
Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An audio digitisation technique that codes the difference between samples rather than coding an absolute measurement at each sample point.
Digital Satellite News-Gathering.
DTE
DTH
DVB
DVB SI
Data circuit Terminating Equipment: A communications device that originates (is the source) or is the end receiving unit (destination) of signals on a network. It is typically a terminal or computer.
Direct To Home. The term used to describe uninterrupted transmission from the satellite directly to the subscriber, that is, no intermediary cable or terrestrial network utilised.
Digital Video Broadcasting: A European project which has defined transmission standards for digital broadcasting systems using satellite (DVB-S), cable (DVB-C) and terrestrial (DVB-
T) medium, created by the EP-DVB group and approved by the ITU. Specifies modulation, error correction, etc. (see EN 300 421 for satellite, EN 300 429 for cable and EN 300 744 for terrestrial).
Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information.
Page A-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
EBU
ECM
EMM
Encryption
EPG
Ethernet
ETS
FBAS
Glossary usually by connecting a wire between the Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack. This is sometimes known as a Functional earth.
Protective Earth: Used for electric shock protection. This is sometimes known as a safety earth.
European Broadcast Union.
Entitlement Control Message.
EIA
EIT
Elementary Stream
Electronics Industries Association (USA).
Event Information Table: Equipment: A component of the DVB-Service Information (SI) stream generated within an Encoder, containing information about events or programmes such as event name, start time, duration, etc.
System: EIT (Present/Following) contains the name of the current and next event. It may include an optional descriptor (synopsis) giving brief details of content. EIT (Schedule) is used to produce a full EPG. The EIT is the only DVB-SI table, which can be encrypted.
A generic term for a coded bitstream, be it video, audio or other.
Entitlement Management Message.
Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the appropriate decryption equipment and authorisation.
Electronic Programme Guide: On-screen programme listing using thumbnail pictures and/or text.
The most widely used local area network (LAN) defined by the IEEE as the 802.3 standard.
Transmission speeds vary according to the configuration. Ethernet uses copper or fibre-optic cables.
European Telecommunications Standard.
German for CVBS
FDM
FEC
FFT
FIFO
Footprint
Frequency Division Multiplex: A common communication channel for a number of signals, each with its own allotted frequency.
Forward Error Correction: A method of catching errors in a transmission. The data is processed through an algorithm that adds extra bits and sends these with the transmitted data. The extra bits are then used at the receiving end to check the accuracy of the transmission and correct any errors.
Fast Fourier Transformation: A fast algorithm for performing a discrete Fourier transform.
First In, First Out: A data structure or hardware buffer from which items are taken out in the same order they were put in. Also known as a shelf from the analogy with pushing items onto one end of a shelf so that they fall off the other. A FIFO is useful for buffering a stream of data between a sender and receiver that are not synchronised - i.e. they not sending and receiving at exactly the same rate.
The area of the Earth’s surface covered by a satellite’s downlink transmission. Also
(generally) the area from which the satellite can receive uplink transmissions.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page A-5
Glossary
FTP
G.703
GOP
GUI
File Transfer Protocol: A protocol used to transfer files over a TCP/IP network (Internet,
UNIX, etc.). For example, after developing the HTML pages for a Web site on a local machine, they are typically uploaded to the Web server, using FTP. Unlike e-mail programs in which graphics and program files have to be attached, FTP is designed to handle binary files directly and does not add the overhead of encoding and decoding the data.
The ITU-T standard which defines the physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.
Group of Pictures: MPEG video compression works more effectively by processing a number of video frames as a block. The TANDBERG Television Encoder normally uses a 12 frame GOP; every twelfth frame is an I frame.
Graphical User Interface: The use of pictures rather than just words to represent the input and output of a program. A program with a GUI runs under a windowing system and has a screen interface capable of displaying graphics in the form of icons, drop-down menus and a movable pointer. The on-screen information is usually controlled / manipulated by a mouse or keyboard.
HDTV
HPA
HSYNC
HU
Hub
High Definition Television.
High Power Amplifier: Used in the signal path to amplify the modulated and up-converted broadcast signal for feeding to the uplink antenna.
Horizontal (line) SYNCs.
Height Unit
A device in a multipoint network at which branch nodes interconnect.
ICAM Integrated Conditional Access Module: Embedded in the IRD and responsible for descrambling, plus packet filtering and reception. It also contains the physical interface to the subscriber’s viewing card.
IDU Indoorunit
IF
Interframe Coding
Intraframe Coding
I-picture; I-frame
IPPV
Intermediate Frequency: Usually refers to the 70 MHz or 140 MHz output of the Modulator in cable, satellite and terrestrial transmission applications.
Compression coding involving consecutive frames. When consecutive frames are compared, temporal redundancy is used to remove common elements (information) and arrive at difference information. MPEG-2 uses B and P frames, but since they are individually incomplete and relate to other adjacent frames, they cannot be edited independently.
Compression coding involving a single frame. Redundant information is removed on a per frame basis. All other frames are ignored. Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses information only from that macroblock or picture. Exploits spatial redundancy by using DCT to produce I frames; these are independent frames and can be edited. protocol, which contains a network address and is used to route a message to a different network or sub-network. IP accepts packets from the layer 4 transport protocol (TCP or UDP), adds its own header to it and delivers a datagram to the layer 2 data link protocol. It may also break the packet into fragments to support the Maximum Transmission / Transfer Unit (MTU) of the network.
Intracoded Picture/Frame: A picture / frame, which is coded using purely intracoding with reference to no other field or frame information. The I frame is used as a reference for other compression methods.
Impulse Pay Per View: One-time events, purchased at home (on impulse) using a prearranged SMS credit line.
Page A-6 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
IRD
IRE
ISDN
ISOG
ITS
Glossary
Integrated Receiver Decoder: The Receiver with an internal MPEG Decoder, which is connected to the subscriber’s TV. The IRD is responsible for receiving and de-multiplexing all signals. The unit receives the incoming signal and if CA is active, decodes the signal when provided with a control word by the viewing card.
Domestic IRDs are also known as Set-Top Units or Set-Top Boxes.
Institute of Radio Engineers: No longer in existence but the name lives on as a unit of video amplitude measurement. This unit is 1% of the range between blanking a peak white for a standard amplitude signal.
Integrated Services Digital Network: The basic ISDN service is BRI (Basic Rate Interface), which is made up of two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel (2B+D). If both channels are combined into one, called bonding, the total data rate becomes 128 kbit/s and is four and a half times the bandwidth of a V.34 modem
(28.8 kbit/s).
The ISDN high-speed service is PRI (Primary Rate Interface). It provides 23 B channels and one 64 kbit/s D channel (23B+D), which is equivalent to the 24 channels of a T1 line. When several channels are bonded together, high data rates can be achieved. For example, it is common to bond six channels for quality videoconferencing at 384 kbit/s. In Europe, PRI includes 30 B channels and one D channel, equivalent to an E1 line.
Inter-union Satellite Operations Group.
Insertion Test Signal: A suite of analogue test signals placed on lines in the VBI. Also known as VITS. kbit/s
Kbit
Ku-band
LAN
L-band
LED
LNB
JPEG lsb
Luminance
CCIR).
(was CCITT).
Joint Photographic Experts Group: ISO/ITU standard for compressing still images. It has a high compression capability. Using discrete cosine transform, it provides user specified compression ratios up to around 100:1 (there is a trade-off between image quality and file size).
1000 bits per second.
1024 bits, usually refers to memory capacity or allocation.
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the frequency range of approximately 12 GHz to 14 GHz. Used by communications satellites. Preferred for DTH applications because this range of frequency is less susceptible to interference.
Local Area Network: A network, which provides facilities for communications within a defined building or group of buildings in close proximity.
The frequency band from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz, which is the normal input-frequency-range of a domestic IRD. The incoming signal from the satellite is down-converted to L-band by the
LNB.
Light Emitting Diode.
Low Noise Block Down-Converter: The component of a subscriber satellite transmission receiving dish which amplifies the incoming signal and down-converts it to a suitable frequency to input to the IRD (typically 950 MHz - 1600 MHz).
Least significant bit.
The television signal representing brightness, or the amount of light at any point in a picture.
The Y in YC
R
C
B.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page A-7
Glossary
LVDS
Macroblock
Mbit/s
MCC
MCPC
MEM
Low Voltage Differential Signal: LVDS is a generic multi-purpose Interface standard for high speed / low power data transmission. It was standardised in ANSI/TIA/EIA-644-1995
Standard (aka RS-644).
A 16x16-pixel area of the TV picture. Most processing within the MPEG domain takes place with macro blocks. These are converted to four 8x8 blocks using either frame DCT or field
DCT. Four 8 x 8 blocks of luminance data and two (4:2:0 chrominance format), four (4:2:2) or eight (4:4:4) corresponding 8 x 8 blocks of chrominance data coming from a 16 x 16 section of the luminance component of the picture. Macroblock can be used to refer to the sample data and to the coded representation of the sample values and other data elements.
Million bits per second.
Multiplex Control Computer: A component of a System 3000 compression system. The
MCC sets up the configuration for the System 3000 Multiplexers under its control. The MCC controls both the main and backup Multiplexer for each transport stream.
Multiple Channels Per Carrier.
Multiplex Element Manager: A GUI based control system, part of the range of TANDBERG
Television compression system control element products. The evolution 5000 MEM holds a model of the system hardware. Using this model, it controls the individual system elements to configure the output multiplexes from the incoming elementary streams. The MEM monitors the equipment status and controls any redundancy switching.
MMDS Multichannel Microwave Distribution System: A terrestrial microwave direct-to-home broadcast transmission system.
Motion Compensation The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction of sample values. The prediction uses motion vectors to provide offsets into the past and/or future reference frames or fields containing previously decoded sample values that are used to form the prediction error signal.
Motion Estimation
Motion Vector
MP@ML
MP@HL
MPEG
MPEG-2 msb
Msymbol/s
Multiplex
MUSICAM
Mux
The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process.
A two-dimensional vector used for motion compensation that provides an offset from the coordinate position in the current picture or field to the co-ordinates in a reference frame or field.
Main Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 15 Mbit/s over various mediums.
Main Profile at High Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 80 Mbit/s over various mediums.
Moving Pictures Experts Group: The name of the ISO/IEC working group which sets up the international standards for digital television source coding.
Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression and multiplexing techniques to minimise video signal bitrate in preparation for broadcasting. Specified in
ISO/IEC 13818. The standard is split into layers and profiles defining bitrates and picture resolutions.
Most significant bit.
(Msym/s) Mega (million) Symbols per second (10
6
Symbols per second).
A number of discrete data streams (typically 8 to 12), from encoders, that are compressed together in a single DVB compliant transport stream for delivery to a Modulator.
Masking pattern adapted Universal Sub-band Integrated Coding And Multiplexing: An audio bitrate reduction system relying on sub-band coding and psychoacoustic masking.
Multiplexer: Transmission Multiplexer: receives EMMs from the ACC, ECMs from the BCC, video/audio data from the encoders, and the SI stream from the SIC. It then multiplexes them all into a single DVB-compliant transport stream, and delivers the signal to the uplink after modulation.
The Multiplexer also contains the cypher card, which scrambles the services according to the control words supplied by the BCC.
Page A-8 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
NTSC
NVOD
NVRAM
OFDM
PAT
PCM
PCR
PDC
OPPV
OSD
Packet
PAL
Network
NICAM
NIT
Glossary
In the context of broadcasting: a collection of MPEG-2 transport stream multiplexes transmitted on a single delivery system, for example, all digital channels on a specific cable system.
Near Instantaneously Companded Audio Multiplex: Official name is NICAM 728. Used for digital stereo sound broadcasting in the UK employing compression techniques to deliver very near CD quality audio.
728 refers to
the bitrate in kbit/s.
Network Information Table: Part of the service information data. The NIT provides information about the physical organisation of each transport stream multiplex, and the characteristics of the network itself (such as the actual frequencies and modulation being used). a unit of length equal to one thousand millionth (10
-9
) of a metre.
National Television Systems Committee: The group, which developed analogue standards used in television broadcast systems in the United States. Also adopted in other countries
(e.g. Mexico, Canada, Japan). This system uses 525 picture lines and a 59.97 Hz field frequency.
Near Video On Demand: Method of offering multiple showings of movies or events. The showings are timed to start at set intervals, determined by the broadcaster. Each showing of a movie or event can be sold to subscribers separately.
Non-volatile Random Access Memory: Memory devices (permitting random read / write access) that do not lose their information when power is removed. Stores the default configuration parameters set by the user.
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex: A modulation technique used for digital TV transmission in Europe, Japan and Australia; more spectrally efficient than FDM. In OFDM, data is distributed over a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies. The carriers are arranged with overlapping sidebands in such a way that the signals can be received without adjacent channel interference.
Order ahead Pay Per View: An advance purchase of encrypted one-time events with an expiry date.
On-screen display: Messages and graphics, typically originating from the SMS, and displayed on the subscriber’s TV screen by the IRD, to inform the subscriber of problems or instruct the subscriber to contact the SMS.
A unit of data transmitted over a packet-switching network. A packet consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes from an elementary data stream.
Phase Alternating Line:
A colour TV broadcasting system where the phase of the R-Y colour-difference signal is inverted on every alternate line to average out errors providing consistent colour reproduction.
Program Association Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance. The PAT points (maps) to the PMT.
Pulse Code Modulation: A process in which a signal is sampled, each sample is quantised independently of other samples, and the resulting succession of quantised values is encoded into a digital signal.
Program Clock Reference: A time stamp in the transport stream from which the Decoder timing is derived.
Program Delivery Control: A Teletext service allowing simple programming (i.e. VideoPlus) of VCR recording times. If the desired program is rescheduled, PDC updates the programming information in the VCR.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page A-9
Glossary
Pel
PES
Picture Element: Also known as a pixel. The smallest resolvable rectangular area of an image either on a screen or stored in memory. On-screen, pixels are made up of one or more dots of colour. Monochrome and grey-scale systems use one dot per pixel. For grey-scale, the pixel is energised with different intensities, creating a range from dark to light (a scale of
0-255 for an eight-bit pixel). Colour systems use a red, green and blue dot per pixel, each of which is energised to different intensities, creating a range of colours perceived as the mixture of these dots. If all three dots are dark, the result is black. If all three dots are bright, the result is white.
Packetised Elementary Stream: A sequential stream of data bytes that has been converted from original elementary streams of audio and video access units and transported as packets.
Each PES packet consists of a header and a payload of variable length and subject to a maximum of 64 kbytes. A time stamp is provided by the MPEG-2 systems layer to ensure correct synchronisation between related elementary streams at the Decoder. data stream. An MPEG-2 / DVB standard.
PIN Personal Identification Number: A password used to control access to programming and to set purchase limits. Each subscriber household can activate several PINs and may use them to set individual parental rating or spending limits for each family member.
Pixel PIX (picture) Element: The digital representation of the smallest area of a television picture capable of being delineated by the bitstream. See Pel for more information. pk-pk peak to peak: Measurement of a signal or waveform from its most negative point to its most positive point.
PMT
P-picture/P-frame ppm
PPV
Program
Programme
P
R
P
B
PROM
PS an object by comparing its rotational position (phase) with another rotating object as in the case of a sine wave or other repeating signal. This type of control system can synchronise not only the speed, but also the angular position of two waveforms that are not derived from the same source.
Program Map Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance. Each service has a PMT, which lists the component parts
(elementary streams of video, audio, etc.) for the various services being transmitted.
A picture / frame produced using forward prediction. It contains predictions from either previous I frames or previous P frames. The P frame is used as a reference for future P or B frames.
Parts per million.
Pay Per View: A system of payment for viewing services based on a usage / event basis rather than on on-going subscription. Subscribers must purchase viewing rights for each PPV event that they wish to view. PPV events may be purchased as IPPV or OPPV.
PC - A sequence of instructions for a computer.
TV - A concept having a precise definition within ISO 13818-1 (MPEG-2). For a transport stream, the timebase is defined by the PCR. The use of the PCR for timing information creates a virtual channel within the stream.
A linking of one or more events under the control of a broadcaster. For example, football match, news, film show. In the MPEG-2 concept, the collection of elementary streams comprising the programme, have a common start and end time. A series of programmes are referred to as events.
Analogue Colour difference signals. Refer to C
R
C
B
for an explanation.
Programmable Read-Only Memory: A device, which may be written once with data for permanent storage, and then read whenever required. Special types of PROM permit the erasure of all data by Ultraviolet light (EPROM) or by application of an electronic signal
(EEPROM).
Program Stream: A combination of one or more PESs with a common timebase.
Page A-10 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
PSI
PSIP
PSK
PSR
PSU
QAM
QPSK
QSIF
Quantise
RAM
RAS
RF
RGB
ROM
RS
RLC
SCPC
Spectral Scrambling
Scrambling
SDI
SDT
SELV
Glossary
Program Specific Information: Consists of normative data, which is necessary for the demultiplexing of transport streams and the successful regeneration of programs.
(See also: SI).
Program System Information Protocol: The ATSC equivalent of SI for DVB.
Phase Shift Keying: A method of modulating digital signals particularly suited to satellite transmission.
Professional Satellite Receiver: See also: IRD.
Power Supply Unit.
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation: A method of modulating digital signals, which uses combined techniques of phase modulation and amplitude modulation. It is particularly suited to cable networks.
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying: A form of phase shift keying modulation using four states.
Quarter Screen Image Format.
A process of converting analogue waveforms to digital information. 8-bit quantisation as set out in ITU-R Rec. 601. uses 256 levels in the range 0 – 255 to determine the analogue waveform value at any given point. The value is then converted to a digital number for processing in the digital domain.
Random Access Memory: A volatile storage device for digital data. Data may be written to, or read from, the device as often as required. When power is removed, the data it contains is lost.
Remote Authorization System: A TANDBERG TV proprietary public-key encryption system used to prevent unauthorized viewing of a TV programme or programmes.
Radio Frequency.
Red, Green, Blue: The Chroma information in a video signal.
Read Only Memory: A non-volatile storage device for digital data. Data has been stored permanently in this device. No further information may be stored (written) there and the data it holds cannot be erased. Data may be read as often as required.
Reed-Solomon coding: An error detection and correction, coding system. 16 bytes of Reed-
Solomon Forward Error Correction code are appended to the packet before transmission bringing the packet length to 204 bytes. The 16 bytes are used at the receiving end to correct any errors. Up to eight corrupted bytes can be corrected.
Run Length Coding: Minimisation of the length of a bitstream by replacing repeated characters with an instruction of the form ‘repeat character x y times’.
Single Channel Per Carrier.
A process (in digital transmission) used to combine a digital signal with a pseudo-random sequence, producing a randomised digital signal that conveys the original information in a form optimised for a broadcast channel.
Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to prevent unauthorised reception of the information in clear form.
Serial Digital Interface.
Service Description Table: Provides information in the SI stream about the services in the system; for example, the name of the service, the service provider, etc.
Safety Extra Low Voltage (EN 60950). television and the cable TV company. New technologies evolving for set-top boxes are videoon-demand, video games, educational services, database searches, and home shopping. The cable equivalent of the IRD.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page A-11
Glossary
SI
Single Packet Burst
Mode
Smart Card
SMATV
SMPTE
SMS with a common transmission multiplex. All transmitters in the network are synchronously modulated with the same signal and they all radiate on the same frequency. Due to the multipath capability of the multi-carrier transmission system (COFDM), signals from several transmitters arriving at a receiving antenna may contribute constructively to the total wanted signal. The SFN technique is not only frequency efficient but also power efficient because fades in the field strength of one transmitter may be filled by another transmitter.
Service Information: Digital information describing the delivery system, content and scheduling (timing) of broadcast data streams. DVB-SI data provides information to enable the IRD to automatically demultiplex and decode the various streams of programmes within the multiplex.
Specified in ISO/IEC 13818[1]. (DVB)
A burst of ASI bytes (either 188 or 204, depending on packet length) is contiguously grouped into an MPEG-2 Transport Stream packet. Stuffing data is added between the packets to increase the data rate to 270 Mbit/s. See DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI)
Layer-2 Transport Protocol.
A plastic card with a built-in microprocessor and memory used for identification, financial transactions or other authorising data transfer. When inserted into a reader, data is transferred to and from the host machine or a central computer. It is more secure than a magnetic stripe card and it can be disabled if the wrong password is entered too many times.
As a financial transaction card, it can be loaded with digital money and used in the same way as cash until the balance reaches zero. The file protocol is specific to its intended application.
Satellite Mast Antenna Television: A distribution system, which provides sound and television signals to the households of a building or group of buildings, typically used to refer to an apartment block.
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.
Subscriber Management System: A system which handles the maintenance, billing, control and general supervision of subscribers to conditional access technology viewing services provided through cable and satellite broadcasting.
An SMS can be an automatic (e.g. Syntellect) system where subscribers order entitlements by entering information via a telephone. Alternatively, an SMS can be a manual system, which requires subscribers to speak with an operator who then manually enters their entitlement requests. Some systems support multiple SMSs.
Spatial Redundancy Information repetition due to areas of similar luminance and/or chrominance characteristics within a single frame. Removed using DCT and Quantisation (Intra-Frame Coding).
Statistical Redundancy Data tables are used to assign fewer bits to the most commonly occurring events, thereby reducing the overall bitrate. Removed using Run Length Coding and Variable Length Coding.
TAXI Transparent Asynchronous Tx / Rx Interface: A proprietary high-speed data interface.
TCP / IP
TDM
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol: A set of communications protocols that may be used to connect different types of computers over networks.
Time Division Multiplex: One common, communications channel carrying a number of signals, each with its own allotted time slot.
TDT Time and Date Table: Part of the DVB Service Information. The TDT gives information relating to the present time and date.
Temporal Redundancy Information repetition due to areas of little or no movement between successive frames.
Removed using motion estimation and compensation (Inter-Frame Coding).
Time stamp A term that indicates the time of a specific action such as the arrival of a byte or the presentation of a presentation unit.
Page A-12 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
TSP
U
UART
Upconvert
Uplink
UPS
UTC
VITC
VITS
VPS
WSS
WST
XILINX
XLR
Y (Luminance)
Y/C
YUV
TOT
Transport Stream
Transport Stream
Packet Header
TS
TSDT
Glossary
Time Offset Table: This optional SI table supports the use of local offsets as well as the UTC time/date combination.
The purpose of the table is to list by country the current offset from UTC and the next expected change to that offset (to track when daylight saving occurs).
The offset resolution is to within 1 minute over a range of
±
12 hours from UTC.
A set of packetised elementary data streams and SI streams, which may comprise more than one programme, but with common synchronisation and error protection. The data structure is defined in ISO/IEC 13818-1 [1] and is the basis of the ETSI Digital Video Broadcasting standards.
A data structure used to convey information about the transport stream payload.
Transport Stream.
Transport Stream Descriptor Table: A component of the MPEG-2 PSI data. This table describes which type of Transport stream it is in (i.e. DVB, ATSC etc.). It may also contain other descriptors.
Transport Stream Processor.
44.45 mm (rack height standard).
Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter: A device providing a serial interface for transmitting and receiving data.
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a higher frequency range.
The part of the communications satellite circuit that extends from the Earth to the satellite.
Uninterruptable Power Supply: A method of supplying backup power when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes; enough to power down the computer in an orderly manner. This is particularly important where write back cache is used.
Write back cache is where modified data intended for the disk is temporarily stored in RAM and can be lost in the event of a power failure. Sophisticated systems are tied to electrical generators that can provide power for days. UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may provide voltage regulation.
Universal Time Co-ordinate: An internationally agreed basis for timekeeping introduced in
1972 and based on international atomic time (corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time or GMT).
Vertical Interval Time Code.
Vertical Interval Test Signal: See: ITS.
Video Programming System: A German precursor to PDC
Wide Screen Switching: Data used in wide-screen analogue services, which enables a receiver to select the appropriate picture display mode.
World System Teletext: System B Teletext. Used in 625 line / 50 Hz television systems (ITU-
R 653).
A type of programmable Integrated Circuit.
Audio connector featuring three leads, two for signal and one for GND.
Defines the brightness of a particular point on a TV line. The only signal required for black and white pictures.
Broadcast video with separate colour, Y (luminance) and C (Chroma) (sometimes called S-
Video).
Y: Luminance component (Brightness), U and V: Chrominance (Colour difference)
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page A-13
Glossary
BLANK
Page A-14 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Annex B
B.
Technical Specification
Contents
Output ...............................................................B-3
International Television Standards.........B-3
Supported Video Bitrates .......................B-3
Supported Video Resolutions.................B-3
Performance Figures .............................B-4
Video Performance ................................B-4
Vertical Blanking Signals .......................B-4
SDI.........................................................B-5
Audio Decoding and Output Stage ....................B-5
General ..................................................B-5
MPEG Audio ..........................................B-5
Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio........................B-6
Linear Audio...........................................B-6
Audio Output Format.........................................B-6
General ..................................................B-6
Analogue Audio......................................B-6
Digital Audio...........................................B-7
Embedded Audio ...................................B-7
Audio Routing ........................................B-7
Lip Sync .................................................B-7
Supported Audio Specifications .............B-8
Supported Audio Bitrates .......................B-8
Digital Audio Outputs .............................B-8
Internal Decoder................................................B-9
Input Option Specifications..............................B-10
B.5.1
QPSK Satellite Receivers
(TT1260/HWO/QPSK) .........................B-10
General ................................................B-10
LNB Power and Control .......................B-11
B.5.2
16QAM/QPSK Satellite Receivers (4-
input) (TT1260/HWO/HOM) .................B-12
B.5.3
DVB-S2 Satellite Receivers
(TT1260/HWO/DVBS2,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C) ..........B-13
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
LNB Power and Control....................... B-16
B.5.4
COFDM Terrestrial Receivers
(TT1260/HWO/COFDM678) ............... B-16
B.5.5
TTV G.703 Input
(TT1260/HWO/G703).......................... B-17
B.5.6
ATM AAL-1 E3 ATM Input
(TT1260/HWO/ATM-E3) ..................... B-17
B.5.7
ATM AAL-1 DS3 ATM Input
(TT1260/HWO/ATM-DS3)................... B-18
DVB-ASI Input (TT1260/HWO/ASI) .... B-18
B.5.9
QPSK/ASI Input
(TT1260/HWO/QPSK/ASI).................. B-18
LNB Power and Control....................... B-20
B.5.10
10/100BaseT IP Input
(TT1260/HWO/IP) ............................... B-20
Output Options ............................................... B-22
B.6.1
High-speed Data
(TT1260/HWO/HSDATA) .................... B-22
B.6.2
High-Speed Data over Ethernet
(TT1280/SWO/HSETHER).................. B-22
Frame Sync Connector................................... B-23
Output Specifications ..................................... B-23
Video Outputs ..................................... B-23
Analogue Composite Video................. B-23
Digital Video ........................................ B-24
Audio Outputs ..................................... B-24
Data Outputs ....................................... B-24
RS-232 Asynchronous (Low-speed)
Data .................................................... B-24
B.8.4
RS-232/RS-485 Remote Control
Connector ........................................... B-25
Ethernet Connector ............................. B-25
Transport Stream Output .................... B-25
Packet Lengths ................................... B-25
Summary Alarm Connector ................. B-26
B.8.8
Alarm Connector
(TT1260/HWO/ALRM) [Option] ........... B-26
Page B-1
Technical Specification
Environmental ................................................ B-26
Conditions ........................................... B-26
Physical............................................... B-27
Power Supply ................................................. B-27
A.C. Mains Input.................................. B-27
D.C. Supply Input (-48 Vdc Version) ... B-28
Cable Types ................................................... B-28
Compliance .................................................... B-29
Safety.................................................. B-29
EMC .................................................... B-29
CE Marking ......................................... B-29
C-Tick Mark......................................... B-30
Packaging Statement .......................... B-30
Packaging Markings ............................ B-30
Materials Declarations......................... B-31
For the European Union ...................... B-31
For China ............................................ B-31
Equipment Disposal ............................ B-32
General ............................................... B-32
For the European Union ...................... B-32
Recycling............................................. B-32
List of Tables
Table B.1: International Television Standards - 525 Line
Output....................................................................B-3
Table B.2: International Television Standards - 625 Line
Output....................................................................B-3
Table B.3: Supported Video Resolutions ..............................B-4
Table B.4: Video Performance ..............................................B-4
Table B.5: Analogue Audio Performance Specifications.......B-7
Table B.6: Supported Audio Specifications ...........................B-8
Table B.7: Supported Audio Data Bitrates (MPEG-2) ...........B-8
Table B.8: Maximum User Bitrates........................................B-9
Table B.9: QPSK Satellite Receiver Input Specification .....B-10
Table B.10: QPSK L-band Satellite Input — C/N Ratio.......B-11
Table B.11: QPSK Bitrate R188 Limits (Mbit/s)...................B-11
Table B.12: LNB Power and Control ...................................B-11
Table B.13: L-band Input Specification ...............................B-12
Table B.14: Demodulator ....................................................B-13
Table B.15: Maximum Bitrates ........................................... B-13
Table B.16: DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver Input
Specification ....................................................... B-13
Table B.17: DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver Input – DVB-S
C/N Ratio ............................................................ B-15
Table B.18: DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver Input – DVB-S2
Es/No Ratio......................................................... B-15
Table B.19: LNB Power and Control................................... B-16
Table B.20: COFDM Front-end Parameters ....................... B-16
Table B.21: COFDM Parameters........................................ B-17
Table B.22: TTV G.703 Input Specification ........................ B-17
Table B.23 Interface Specifications .................................... B-17
Table B.24: Interface Specifications ................................... B-18
Table B.25: DVB-ASI Copper ............................................. B-18
Table B.26: QPSK Satellite Receiver Input Specification... B-18
Table B.27: QPSK L-band Satellite Input — C/N Ratio ...... B-19
Table B.28: QPSK Bitrate R188 Limits (Mbit/s) .................. B-20
Table B.29: LNB Power and Control................................... B-20
Table B.30: ASI Copper...................................................... B-20
Table B.31: 10/100BaseT IP Input Specifications .............. B-20
Table B.32: RS-422 Synchronous Data Output
Specification ....................................................... B-22
Table B.33: High-speed Data Over Ethernet Connector .... B-22
Table B.34: Frame Sync Connector ................................... B-23
Table B.35: Analogue Video Output Connectors................ B-23
Table B.36: Digital Video Output Connectors ..................... B-24
Table B.37: Analogue and Digital Audio Output
Connector ........................................................... B-24
Table B.38: RS-232 Asynchronous (Low-speed) Data
Connector ........................................................... B-24
Table B.39: RS232/485 Control Connector ........................ B-25
Table B.40: SNMP Control Connector................................ B-25
Table B.41: Transport Stream Output Bitrates ................... B-25
Table B.42: Summary Relay Alarm Output Specification ... B-26
Table B.43: Relay Alarm Output Specification
(TT1260/HWO/ALARM)...................................... B-26
Table B.44: Environmental Conditions ............................... B-26
Table B.45: Physical Parameters ....................................... B-27
Table B.46: A.C. Power Supply Specification..................... B-27
Table B.47: D.C. Power Supply Specification..................... B-28
Table B.48: Suitable Signal Cable Types ........................... B-28
Page B-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
B.1 Output
B.1.1 International Television Standards
Two composite video outputs are provided at the rear panel. These carry identical video. The standard is selectable to PAL- I, B, G, D, N, M and NTSC-M (with or without pedestal).
Table B.1: International Television Standards - 525 Line Output
As indicated in Menus: NTSC-M
Lines / frame
Fields / second
525
60
NTSC-NP
525
60
PAL-M
525
60
Frames / second
Lines / second
Video band (MHz)
RF band (MHz)
30 (29.97)
15 750
4.2
6.0
30 (29.97)
15 750
4.2
6.0
30 (29.97)
15 750
4.2
6.0
Table B.2: International Television Standards - 625 Line Output
As indicated in Menus: PAL B/G/I
Lines / frame
Fields / second
625
50
PAL-N
625
50
PAL-N CBN
625
50
Frames / second
Lines / second
Video band (MHz)
RF band (MHz)
25
15 625
5.0/5.5
7.0/8.0
25
15 625
4.2
6.0
25
15 625
4.2
6.0
B.1.2 Supported Video Bitrates
The equipment supports decoding of non-encrypted compressed video at rates of up to
50 Mbit/s for 4:2:2 video at MP@ML and 15 Mbit/s for 4:2:0 MP@ML.
B.1.3 Supported Video Resolutions
The IRD supports 4:2:0 MP@ML and 4:2:2P@ML with video resolutions described in
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-3
Technical Specification
Table B.3: Supported Video Resolutions
625-line, 25 frame/s
720 pixels x 608 active lines
720 pixels x 576 active lines
704 pixels x 576 active lines
544 pixels x 576 active lines
480 pixels x 576 active lines
352 pixels x 576 active lines
352 pixels x 288 active lines
525-line, 30 (29.97) frame/s
720 pixels x 512 active lines
720 pixels x 480 active lines
704 pixels x 480 active lines
544 pixels x 480 active lines
480 pixels x 480 active lines
352 pixels x 480 active lines
352 pixels x 240 active lines
4:2:2 mode only
4:2:0 and 4:2:2 modes
Video Performance
Table B.4: Video Performance
Parameter Performance
Luminance bar amplitude PAL: 700 ± 20 mV NTSC: 100 ± 2 IRE
Sync amplitude
Burst amplitude
Pedestal
Luminance bar tilt
2T K Response
Differential gain
Differential phase
Luminance non-linearity
Signal-to-noise luminance weighted 1
Chrominance – luminance gain
Chrominance – luminance delay
Chrominance to AM noise ratio
Chrominance to PM noise ratio
Luminance freq. response
300 ± 7 mV
300 ± 7 mV
0.5%
1%K
1% peak to peak
1 ° peak to peak
± 4%
≥ 60 dBw
± 2%
± 10 ns
-60 dBrms
-55 dBrms
0-5 MHz: ± 0.2 dB; 5.8 MHz: -2+0 dB
40 ± 1 IRE
40 ± 1 IRE
Vertical Blanking Signals
The TT1260 range of Receivers and Decoders support the following VBI reinsertion and signalling:
•
Video Programming System (VPS)/Programme Delivery Control (PDC) data and pass through
•
Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) data and pass through
•
Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC) insertion (525 and 625 line)
•
Video Index data
•
Neilson Coding AMOL 1 and AMOL 2
1
Signal-to-noise luminance weighted: measured on an active video line with unmodulated ramp video signal.
Page B-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
•
Support for Closed Captioning (ATSC, Divicom and TTV proprietary MPEG carriage protocol)
•
Insertion Test Signal (ITS) insertion (CCIR and FCC/UK)
•
World System Teletext (WST)
•
Inverted Teletext (WST)
•
Vertical Interval Test Signal (VITS) (525 and 625 line)
•
Decode of VBI in Video (4:2:2 only)
•
VBI is simultaneously output on CVBS and SDI outputs
•
North American Basic Teletext (NABTS)
SDI
SDI output supports:
•
Embedded Decoded Audios
•
EDH
•
VBI
B.2 Audio Decoding and Output Stage
B.2.1 General
The IRD is capable of simultaneously decoding two PES streams of audio from the transport stream. Each of the decoders is identical in operation, but act completely independently of the other, with the following exceptions:
•
Both decoders must be decoding channels that have the same sampling rate
•
Both decoders are not required to simultaneously decode the same PES stream
Each channel supports extraction of three types of coded audio from the Transport Stream as follows:
•
MPEG-1, Layer 2 Audio (Musicam): ISO/IEC 13818-3
•
Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio: ATSC document A/52
•
Linear Audio: SMPTE 302M – 2000
Audio component selection is specified from the User Interface or remote interfaces. The
TT1260 automatically detects the audio type of the selected audio component and applies the appropriate algorithm. Where there are audio components in the selected service of the same language but different coding types, the preferred component is linear audio, followed by
Dolby Digital AC-3, and followed by MPEG audio.
There is no requirement for specific selection behaviour where a service contains two or more audio components of the same coding type and language. The TT1260 is not required to support dynamic changes in the audio coding type once the initial selection has been made.
Provision is made in the User Interface and remote interfaces for user override of default audio selection by language and audio coding type, or by PID.
There is no support for static default languages.
The TT1260 supports decoding of MPEG audio as follows:
•
Compression layers: MPEG-1 layers I and II
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-5
Technical Specification
•
Sampling rates (kHz): 32, 44.1, 48
•
Maximum compressed data rate: 384 kbit/s (layer II)
B.2.3 Dolby Digital AC-3 Audio
The TT1260 is able to decode and output the primary stereo pair of a Dolby Digital AC-3 encoded audio stream. When there is data encoded on the audio surround channels, the
Decoder applies downmixing, so that either a surround encoded stereo pair (LtRt downmix) or a conventional stereo pair (LoRo downmix) is available at the output.
The TT1260 is not able to decode and output all 5.1 channels individually as separate channels.
It is possible to output the compressed Dolby Digital stream from the digital audio output, allowing it to be decoded to 5.1 channels by an external Decoder.
Sampling rates (kHz): 32, 44.1, 48
Maximum compressed data rate: 640 Kbit/s
NOTE…
Support for Dolby Digital decoding requires approval and licensing from Dolby. The compressed Dolby
Digital stream is not embedded on the SDI output.
The IRD is able to receive audio data in the form of linear PCM digital audio data, up to 20-bits in resolution, and makes it available for output as either analogue or digital audio.
A maximum of four audio channels can be decoded from one PES stream.
B.3 Audio Output Format
B.3.1 General
The TT1260 provides an independent stereo pair output for each audio channel. Analogue audio is always output and the following Digital audio formats can be chosen from the User
Interface and remote control interfaces:
•
AES3
•
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
•
Digital Audio embedded into the Ancillary Data Space of the Serial Digital Video Output.
Page B-6
The TT1260 supports level control of the audio outputs. Independent control of each output of each stereo pair is provided via the User Interface and remote interfaces.
Audio output connector type: 2 x 9 way female D-type
Output level: +18 dBm nominal clipping level. Selectable in range +12 to
+24 dBm.
Output impedance: 50
Ω
(nominal).
Output Attenuation (option) 0 – 24 dB.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
Table B.5: Analogue Audio Performance Specifications
Parameter Conditions
Gain
Frequency response
Cross talk
Distortion
0 dBm input level
100 Hz - 15 kHz, 0 dBm input level
20 Hz - 20 kHz, 0 dBm input level
0 dB input level, 100 Hz
0 dB input level, 1 kHz
0 dB input level, 10 kHz
+8 dBm input level, 100 Hz
+8 dBm input level, 6.3 kHz
Noise RMS
Phase 40 Hz to 15 kHz
Lip sync delay Depends on synchroniser configuration
Limit
± 1 dB
± 0.2 dB
+0.5 dB, -1 dB
-80 dB
-70 dB
-60 dB
-70 dB
-70 dB
± 2 °
±5 ms
Maximum data rate: 3.072 Mbit/s.
•
EBU Tech. 3250 Specification of the digital audio interface (the AES/EBU interface), 2nd
Edition 1992
•
AES Recommended Practice for Digital Audio Engineering – Serial transmission format for two-channel linearly represented digital audio data (Revision of AES3-1985, ANSI
S4.40-1985)[1999-02-10 printing]
•
ANSI S4.40 – 1992 Recommended Practice for Digital Audio Engineering – Serial
Transmission Format for Two-Channel Linearly Represented Digital Audio Data (AES 3)
Either or both of the stereo pairs selected for decoding by the Receiver can be routed out via the SDI video output, as AES/EBU digital audio embedded in the Ancillary Data Space, as defined in SMPTE 272M-1994. The operational level of this standard supported is SMPTE
272M –A
(20-bit synchronous audio at sampling rates of 48 kHz).
The IRD supports the following routing of audio signal:
•
STEREO (Channel 1 left, Channel 2 right)
•
MIXED TO BOTH (Channel 1 and 2 on left and right)
•
LEFT TO BOTH (Channel 1 on left and right)
•
RIGHT TO BOTH (Channel 2 on left and right)
When the input signal is STEREO, the Audio digital output format will always be STEREO.
Where a dual mono service is available, it is possible to configure the output as MIXED TO
BOTH, LEFT TO BOTH and RIGHT TO BOTH.
The audio at the output remains synchronous to the decoded video by default (i.e. where both video and audio streams are available from the same service). In such circumstances the video and audio streams share the same PCR.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-7
Technical Specification
The lip sync error (delay from presentation of video until presentation of audio) introduced by the Receiver is in the range of ±5 ms.
The lip sync delay between stereo pair 1 and 2 is ±2 ms because the PTS will be presented independently for each pair.
When using frame sync the lip sync error is up to 40 ms due to audio frame skip and repeats.
B.3.7 Supported Audio Specifications
Table B.6: Supported Audio Specifications
Specification Description
ISO/IEC 13818-3
ATSC A-52
SMPTE 302M
Generic Coding of Moving Pictures and Associated Information: (MPEG-2) Audio.
Digital Audio Compression Standard (Dolby Digital).
Linear Audio (TANDBERG Television’s interpretation of the specification).
B.3.8 Supported Audio Bitrates
Table B.7: Supported Audio Data Bitrates (MPEG-2)
Mono kbit/s Stereo kbit/s Mono kbit/s Stereo kbit/s
32 64 96 192
48 96 112 224
56 112 128 256
64 128 160 320
80 160 192 384
B.3.9 Digital Audio Outputs
Digital audio outputs comply with E1A-422
2
and have a maximum data rate of 3.072 Mbit/s.
Digital audio is output on two 9-way, D-type connectors.
Audio output: balanced 2 – 7 volts.
2
EIA-422-A-1978: Electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits.
Page B-8 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
The TT1260 contains an internal Decoder. A packet demultiplexer selects audio, video and ancillary services from the stream received from the digital demodulator. A service filter reduces the incoming data rate (max 160 Mbit/s) to that suitable for demuxing/decryption. The
Decoder supports decoding of compressed video at rates of up to and including
50 Mbit/s.
Table B.8: Maximum User Bitrates
Modulation FEC R188max
QPSK 1/2 41.470588
QPSK 2/3 55.294118
QPSK 3/4 62.205882
QPSK 5/6 69.117647
QPSK 7/8 72.573529 (QPSK Receiver)
72.000000 (8PSK/16QAM Receiver)
16QAM 3/4 110.000000
16QAM 7/8 110.000000
ASI 160
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-9
Technical Specification
B.5 Input Option Specifications
B.5.1 QPSK Satellite Receivers (TT1260/HWO/QPSK)
General
Table B.9: QPSK Satellite Receiver Input Specification
Parameter Specification
L-band input
Safety status
Number of inputs
Input connector type
Input impedance
Return loss
Isolation between inputs
SELV
2
F-type, female 75
75 Ω
> 9 dB
> 40 dB typical
Ω
Frequency
Tuning range 3
Tuning step
Carrier frequency search range
Receive spectrum sense
Fc = 950 to 2150 MHz
100 kHz
0 to ± 5 MHz
Normal and inverted
Power
Input power level per carrier
Total L-band input power
-65 to –25 dBm
< -10 dBm
Oscillator power at the L-band input < -63 dBm, F = Fc and Fc/2
Modulation
Signal type QPSK per EN 300 421 4
Convolutional FEC rates
Symbol rate range
Symbol rate step
Symbol rate lock range
Bitrate R188 range
C/N ratio
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Rs = 1.0 to 45.0 MSymbol/s
1 Symbol/s
± 120 ppm
See
See
Miscellaneous
Phase noise tolerance
SSB phase-noise power spectral density < K + 8.5*Log(Rs) 5 (typical) at δ F = 10 kHz
Phase noise power spectral density of the form C – 20*Log( δ F)
δ F = Frequency offset from carrier
Rs = Symbol-rate (Msymbol/s)
Convolutional FEC rate K
1/2 -77
2/3 -74
3/4, 5/6, 7/8 -71
LNB power and control See
shows the C/N requirements to ensure error free demodulation for all supported
FEC rates.
shows the minimum and maximum possible bitrates for all FEC rates.
3
The displayed frequency is either L-band or SHF dependent on the LNB frequency and the SHF carrier frequency set in the satellite receiver input menu.
4
EN 300 421: Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data services; Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for 11/12 GHz satellite services.
5
These specifications apply in the presence of thermal noise at the threshold Eb/N
0 ratio given in Table B.10
.
Page B-10 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
Table B.10: QPSK L-band Satellite Input — C/N Ratio
Convolutional FEC Rate C/N Ratio (dB) in IF Loop for correct MPEG-2 system operation
1/2 4.5
2/3 5.0
3/4 5.5
5/6 6.0
7/8 6.4
C/N ratio is referred to user bitrate Ru188. See EN 300 421 specification. For more detailed specification information and advice on performance in specific applications, please contact
TANDBERG Television Customer Services.
Table B.11: QPSK Bitrate R188 Limits (Mbit/s)
LNB Power and Control
The IRD provides LNB power and control signals through the active RF input connector. LNB power and controls are enabled through the Satellite Input Menu, see Annex C, Menus .
The IRD supports voltage controlled LNBs only. The LNB power circuit provides automatic protection against short circuits in the LNB or its cable. When the short circuit has been removed recovery is automatic. Switchable boost of the LNB voltage to allow for losses in long cables and control of 22 kHz tone insertion are provided. The LNB power characteristics are detailed in the following table.
Table B.12: LNB Power and Control
Parameter Specification
Voltage V (nominal) Receiver Polarisation 6
Current
LNB control
Tone amplitude
Boost voltage
350 mA maximum
22 ± 2 kHz tone
0.6 ± 0.2 Vp-p
1 V typical
18 Horizontal/circular left
6
Receive Polarisation: As specified in ETS 300 784: Satellite Earth Station and Systems (SES); Television Receive-only (TVRO) earth stations operating in the 11/12 GHz frequency bands.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-11
Technical Specification
B.5.2 16QAM/QPSK Satellite Receivers (4-input) (TT1260/HWO/HOM)
The HMO Card is a 16QAM, 8PSK, QPSK, BPSK input module. This card provides a complete digital front end board for DVB-S, DSNG and other contribution applications and support four L-band inputs
The 16QAM and 8PSK modes of operation are only available if a licence key is purchased.
Methods of remotely controlling the HOM card are the same as for the existing
TT1260/HWO/HM model.
Table B.13: L-band Input Specification
Parameter Specification
Safety Status
Number of inputs
Input connector
Input impedance
Input return-loss
Isolation between inputs
Minimum input level limited by spurious components
Minimum input level limitation
Symbol rate
Maximum input level
Input frequency
Frequency resolution
Input frequency capture & hold range
Frequency increments
Oscillator power at input connector
Noise figure for Pin =-65dBm
SELV
4
F type
75 Ω
12 dB min over specified input frequency range
55 dB min
-60 dBm
-75 dBm nominal gain high gain
This will depend on modulation type, code rate and due to noise figure
Some examples are given below:
QPSK -57 +10*log (Rs/43) nominal gain
-63 +10*log (Rs/43) high gain
8PSK -54 +10*log (Rs/43) nominal gain
-60 +10*log (Rs/43) high gain
16QAM -50 +10*log (Rs/43)
-56 +10*log (Rs/43) nominal gain high gain
-20 dBm for 20.0 ≤ Rs ≤ 43.0 nominal gain
-35 dBm for 20.0 ≤ Rs ≤ 43.0 high gain
For Rs ≤ 20.0: -20 + 10*log (Rs/20)
-35 + 10*log (Rs/20) nominal gain high gain
950 to 2,150 MHz
1 kHz (At software interface level)
BPSK, QPSK: ± 5 MHz
8PSK, 16QAM: ± 2 MHz
1 kHz
< -63 dBm, 40 < Fosc < 2,150 MHz
Second order intercept point
Third-order intercept point
15 dB typical
9 dB typical
+25 dBm min
+10 dBm min
13 dBm typical
-2 dBm typical low gain high gain low gain Pin =-20 dBm high gain Pin = -35 dBm low gain Pin =-20 dBm high gain Pin =-35 dBm
Page B-12 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
Table B.14: Demodulator
Parameter Specification
Signal format for DVB modes EN 301 210
Receive spectrum sense
Automatic FEC search
Receive symbol-rate range
Normal & inverted spectrum capability
BPSK/QPSK DVBS modes only
1.0 - 45 MSymbol/s QPSK DVBS mode
0.256-45 Msymbol/s BPSK DVBS mode
Receive symbol-rate capture range
Maximum output bitrate
± 120 ppm (static)
Using 188 byte output data packets the maximum data rates are as follows
Table B.15: Maximum Bitrates
Modulation
QPSK
Coding Max Symbol Rate
Msym/s
Max Output Bitrate
Mbit/s
DVB 7/8 45 72.6
8/9 110.5
145.1
B.5.3 DVB-S2 Satellite Receivers
(TT1260/HWO/DVBS2,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI, TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C)
The DVB-S2 satellite input card demodulates satellite signals according to the DVB-S and
DVB-S2 specifications.
Table B.16: DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver Input Specification
Parameter Specification
L-band input
Safety status
Number of inputs
Input connector type
Input impedance
Return loss
Isolation between inputs
L-band Frequency
Tuning range 7
Tuning step
Carrier frequency search range
Receive spectrum sense
L-band Power
Input power level per carrier
SELV
4 (TT1260/HWO/DVBS2)
3 (TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI)
3 (TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C)
F-type, female 75 Ω
75 Ω
> 11 dB
> 60 dB, typically 70dB
Fc = 950 to 2150 MHz
1 kHz
± 1 to ± 5 MHz
Normal and inverted
-65 to –25 dBm
7
The displayed frequency is either L-band or SHF dependent on the LNB frequency and the SHF carrier frequency set in the satellite receiver input menu.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-13
Technical Specification
Parameter Specification
Total L-band input power
Oscillator power at the L-band input
IF Monitor Input
Convolutional FEC rates
Symbol rate range
Symbol rate step
Symbol rate lock range
C/N ratio
DVB-S2 Modulation (EN 302 307)
DVB-S2 Mode
< -10 dBm
< -65 dBm, 950 < Fosc < 2150 MHz
Safety Status
Number of inputs
Input connector type
SELV
0 (TT1260/HWO/DVBS2)
1 (TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C)
BNC, female 75 Ω
75 Ω
-19 dB typical
Fc = 50 to 180 MHz
Return loss
Tuning range
Tuning Step
Input power level per carrier
1 kHz
-40 to –25 dBm
DVB-S Modulation (EN 300 421)
Modulation QPSK
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Rs = 1.0 to 45.0 MSymbol/s
1 Symbol/s
± 100 ppm
See
Broadcast Services
QPSK LDPC FEC rates
8PSK, LDPC FEC rates
LDPC FEC Frame length
Pilot tones
Symbol rate range
Symbol rate step
Symbol rate lock range
Maximum Channel bitrate
Maximum user bitrate
Es/No (C/No) ratio
Constellation Output 9
1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9. 9/10
3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10
Normal
Automatic detection
Rs = 1 to 31 MSymbol/s 8
1 Symbol/s
± 100 ppm
90 Mbit/s
81 Mbit/s
See
Safety status SELV
Number of outputs
Output connector type
Output impedance
2 (I and Q)
BNC, female 75 Ω
75 Ω
Miscellaneous
DVB-S Phase noise tolerance 10 SSB phase-noise power spectral density < -68 – 10*log(Rs/20) dBc/Hz at δ F = 10 kHz offset
Phase noise power spectral density of the form C – 20*Log( δ F)
δ F = Frequency offset from carrier
8
Minimum Symbol Rate of 1 MSymbol/s available with low symbol rate license , otherwise minimum rate is 5 MSymbol/s.
9
Enabling this feature disables output transport stream and renders the receiver unable to decode a service. Operational for DVB-S2 modes only.
10
These specifications apply in the presence of thermal noise at the threshold Eb/N
0 ratio given in Table B.17
Page B-14 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
Parameter Specification
DVB-S2 Phase noise tolerance 11
LNB power and control
Rs = Symbol-rate (Msymbol/s)
-25 dBc/Hz at δ F = 100 Hz
-50 dBc/Hz at δ F = 1 kHz
-73 dBc/Hz at δ F = 10 kHz
-93 dBc/Hz at δ F = 100 kHz
-103 dBc/Hz at δ F = 1 MHz
-114 dBc/Hz at δ F > 10 MHz
See
Table B.17 shows the C/N requirements for DVB-S and Table B.18
for DVB-S2 Es/No requirements to ensure error free demodulation for all supported FEC rates.
Table B.17: DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver Input – DVB-S C/N Ratio
Convolutional FEC Rate
1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8
C/N Ratio (dB) in IF Loop for correct MPEG-2 system operation
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.4
C/N ratio is referred to user bitrate Ru188. See EN 300 421 specification. For more detailed specification information and advice on performance in specific applications, please contact
TANDBERG Television Customer Services.
Table B.18: DVB-S2 Satellite Receiver Input – DVB-S2 Es/No Ratio
LDPC FEC Rate
1/2 QPSK
3/5 QPSK
2/3 QPSK
3/4 QPSK
4/5 QPSK
5/6 QPSK
8/9 QPSK
9/10 QPSK
3/5 8PSK
2/3 8PSK
3/4 8PSK
5/6 8PSK
8/9 8PSK
9/10 8PSK
DVB-S2 Theoretical 12 Es/No Ratio (dB) in perfect linear channel for correct MPEG-2 system operation
6.62
7.91
9.35
10.69
10.98
5.18
6.20
6.42
5.50
1.00
2.23
3.10
4.03
4.68
For more detailed specification information and advice on performance in specific applications, please contact TANDBERG Television Customer Services.
11
These specifications apply in the presence of thermal noise at the threshold Es/No ratio given in Table B.18
and assume degradation to the thermal noise performance of 0.3 dB.
12
Add 0.2 dB (0.4 dB for FEC 3/5) to any system calculation for modulator – demodulator implementation margin
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-15
Technical Specification
LNB Power and Control
The IRD provides LNB power and control signals through the active RF input connector. LNB power and controls are enabled through the Satellite Input Menu, see Annex C, Menus .
The IRD supports voltage controlled LNBs only. The LNB power circuit provides automatic protection against short circuits in the LNB or its cable. When the short circuit has been removed recovery is automatic. Switchable boost of the LNB voltage to allow for losses in long cables and control of 22 kHz tone insertion are provided. The LNB power characteristics comply with IEC 1319-1 and are detailed in the following table.
Table B.19: LNB Power and Control
Parameter Specification
Voltage V (nominal) Receiver Polarisation 13
Current
LNB control
Tone amplitude
Boost voltage
350 mA maximum
22 ± 2 kHz tone
0.65 ± 0.2 Vp-p
1 V typical
18 Horizontal/circular left
B.5.4 COFDM Terrestrial Receivers (TT1260/HWO/COFDM678)
The COFDM digital terrestrial input card demodulates digital terrestrial COFDM signals.
COFDM modes supported are:
•
8 MHz bandwidth
•
8 MHz UK bandwidth
•
7 MHz bandwidth
•
6 MHz bandwidth
Table B.20: COFDM Front-end Parameters
Parameter Specification
Safety Status
Input connector
Input level
Frequency range
Channel bandwidth
SELV
75 Ω
-20 to – 80 dBm
48 – 860 MHz (depending on model)
6, 7 or 8 MHz depending on model
13
Receive Polarisation: As specified in ETS 300 784: Satellite Earth Station and Systems (SES); Television Receive-only (TVRO) earth stations operating in the 11/12 GHz frequency bands.
Page B-16 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
Table B.21: COFDM Parameters
Parameter Specification
Guard interval
Carrier mode
Hierarchy stream
Hierarchy mode
Carrier modulation
FEC rate
Spectrum
1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4
2 k, 8 k
High and low priority
None, α = 1, α = 2, α = 4
QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM
1/2. 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Non-inverted and inverted
B.5.5 TTV G.703 Input (TT1260/HWO/G703)
Table B.22: TTV G.703 Input Specification
Input Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Input impedance
Data rate
Network Type
Network Specification
Reed-Solomon
De-Interleaver
Status LED
Output Connector
SELV
BNC, Female
75 Ω
DS3: 45 Mbit/s
E3: 34 Mbit/s
PDH
CCITT (ITU-T) G.703
On/Off, Not available in 188-packet mode
On/Off, Not available in 188-packet mode
Green: Lock, Red: No Lock
Not in use
B.5.6 ATM AAL-1 E3 ATM Input (TT1260/HWO/ATM-E3)
This provides reception of MPEG-2 transport stream packets, respectively RS coded MPEG-2
TS packets, over PDH links using ATM cells, this particular version uses E3 style PDH framing.
This input is designed to be compliant with prETS 300813 DVB Interfaces to PDH Networks.
Table B.23 Interface Specifications
Parameter Specification
Safety status SELV
MPEG-2 TS Packet length 188 or 204 bytes
Error Correction
Interleaving
Reed-Solomon codec: RS(128,124)
Octet interleaver, matrix 128 columns x 47 rows
Framing
Input
Input connector
PDH Framing
According to prETS 300813 DVB Interfaces to PDH Networks
Electrical characteristics in accordance with ITU-T G.703
BNC female, 75 Ω
E3
PDH Bitrate 34.368 Mbit/s
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-17
Technical Specification
B.5.7 ATM AAL-1 DS3 ATM Input (TT1260/HWO/ATM-DS3)
This provides reception of MPEG-2 transport stream packets, respectively RS coded MPEG-2
TS packets, over PDH links using ATM cells, this particular version uses DS3 style PDH framing.
This input is designed to be compliant with prETS 300815 DVB Interfaces to PDH Networks.
Table B.24: Interface Specifications
Parameter Specification
Safety status SELV
MPEG-2 TS Packet length 188 or 204 bytes
Error Correction
Interleaving
Framing
Input
Input connector
PDH Framing
PDH Bitrate
Reed-Solomon codec: RS(128,124)
Octet interleaver, matrix 128 columns x 47 rows
According to prETS 300813 DVB Interfaces to PDH Networks
Frame format for 45Mbit/s is C-bit parity.
Electrical characteristics in accordance with ITU-T G.703
BNC female, 75 Ω
DS3
44.736 Mbit/s
B.5.8 DVB-ASI Input (TT1260/HWO/ASI)
This provides two BNC connectors for reception of ASI signals up to 160 Mbit/s.
Table B.25: DVB-ASI Copper
Input Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Input impedance
Data rate range
Error decoding
SELV
BNC, Female
75 Ω
0.350 - 160 Mbit/s
None
B.5.9 QPSK/ASI Input (TT1260/HWO/QPSK/ASI)
This provides two QPSK inputs and two ASI inputs.
Table B.26: QPSK Satellite Receiver Input Specification
Parameter Specification
L-band input
Safety status
Number of inputs
Input connector type
Input impedance
Return loss
Isolation between inputs
SELV
2
F-type, female 75 Ω
75 Ω
> 9 dB
> 40 dB typical
Page B-18 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
Parameter Specification
Frequency
Tuning range 14 Fc = 950 to 2150 MHz
Tuning step
Carrier frequency search range
Receive spectrum sense
100 kHz
0 to ± 5 MHz
Normal and inverted
Power
Input power level per carrier
Total L-band input power
-65 to –25 dBm
< -10 dBm
Oscillator power at the L-band input < -63 dBm, F = Fc and Fc/2
Modulation
Signal type QPSK per EN 300 421 15
Convolutional FEC rates
Symbol rate range
Symbol rate step
Symbol rate lock range
Bitrate R188 range
C/N ratio
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
Rs = 1.0 to 45.0 MSymbol/s
1 Symbol/s
± 120 ppm
See
See
Miscellaneous
Phase noise tolerance
SSB phase-noise power spectral density < K + 8.5*Log(Rs) 16 (typical) at δ F = 10 kHz
Phase noise power spectral density of the form C – 20*Log( δ F)
δ F = Frequency offset from carrier
Rs = Symbol-rate (Msymbol/s)
Convolutional FEC rate K
1/2 -77
2/3 -74
3/4, 5/6, 7/8 -71
LNB power and control See
shows the C/N requirements to ensure error free demodulation for all supported
shows the minimum and maximum possible bitrates for all FEC rates.
Table B.27: QPSK L-band Satellite Input — C/N Ratio
Convolutional FEC Rate C/N Ratio (dB) in IF Loop for correct MPEG-2 system operation
1/2 4.5
2/3 5.0
3/4 5.5
5/6 6.0
7/8 6.4
C/N ratio is referred to user bitrate Ru188. See EN 300 421 specification. For more detailed specification information and advice on performance in specific applications, please contact
TANDBERG Television Customer Services.
14
The displayed frequency is either L-band or SHF dependent on the LNB frequency and the SHF carrier frequency set in the satellite receiver input menu.
15
EN 300 421: Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data services; Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for 11/12 GHz satellite services.
16
These specifications apply in the presence of thermal noise at the threshold Eb/N
0 ratio given in Table B.10
.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-19
Technical Specification
Table B.28: QPSK Bitrate R188 Limits (Mbit/s)
LNB Power and Control
The IRD provides LNB power and control signals through the active RF input connector. LNB power and controls are enabled through the Satellite Input Menu, see Annex C, Menus .
The IRD supports voltage controlled LNBs only. The LNB power circuit provides automatic protection against short circuits in the LNB or its cable. When the short circuit has been removed recovery is automatic. Switchable boost of the LNB voltage to allow for losses in long cables and control of 22 kHz tone insertion are provided. The LNB power characteristics are as detailed in the following table.
Table B.29: LNB Power and Control
Parameter Specification
Voltage V (nominal) Receiver Polarisation 17
Current
LNB control
Tone amplitude
Boost voltage
Table B.30: ASI Copper
350 mA maximum
22 ± 2 kHz tone
0.6 ± 0.2 Vp-p
1 V typical
18 Horizontal/circular left
Input Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Input impedance
Data rate range
Error decoding
SELV
BNC, Female
75 Ω
0.350 - 160 Mbit/s
None
B.5.10 10/100BaseT IP Input (TT1260/HWO/IP)
This allows transport streams to be piped to the TT1260 over an Ethernet network.
Table B.31: 10/100BaseT IP Input Specifications
Input Specification
Safety status SELV
17
Receive Polarisation: As specified in ETS 300 784: Satellite Earth Station and Systems (SES); Television Receive-only (TVRO) earth stations operating in the 11/12 GHz frequency bands.
Page B-20 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Connector type
Connector Designation
Signal Type
Data Rate
8 way RJ-45
10/100 BT
10/100BaseT Ethernet (IEEE 802.3/802.3u)
1.5 – 50 Mbit/s
Technical Specification
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-21
Technical Specification
B.6.1 High-speed Data (TT1260/HWO/HSDATA)
High-speed data (synchronous data) can be carried in a transport stream as private data. This is then extracted from the transport stream and output from the IRD via an RS-422 interface or
Ethernet.
Data-rates in integer multiples of 56 kbit/s and 64 kbit/s up to
2.048 Mbit/s (subject to the number and type of services in the multiplex.) are output on a 9pin D-type connector.
Table B.32: RS-422 Synchronous Data Output Specification
Item
Safety status
Type:
Connector designation:
Data-rates (bit/s)
Connector type
Supported data-rates
Transport package alignment
Standards
Line length
Specification
SELV
ITU-T V.11 (RS-422) synchronous serial data
RS-422 DATA
Integer multiples of 56 Kbit/s and 64 Kbit/s up to 2.048 Mbit/s
9-way D-type female
Multiples of 56 kbit/s and 64kbits/s up to 2.048 Mbit/s
Transparent to data source. Port operates as a bit-pipe.
EIA RS-422 / ITU-T V.11
< 1200 metres
B.6.2 High-Speed Data over Ethernet (TT1280/SWO/HSETHER)
Ethernet high-speed data can be carried in a transport stream and output using the RJ-45
Ethernet port. This is enabled through the licence key (TT1280/SWO/HSETHER).
The TT1260 extracts data from the MPEG-2 TS stream and output it in IP/Ethernet frames.
The de-encapsulation complies with open encapsulation standards described in ETSI EN 301
192 v.1.2.1 (1999-06), and ATSC document A90 (26 July 00). TT1260 supports unicast
(datagrams targeted to a single receiver), multicast (datagrams targeted to a group of receivers) and broadcast (datagrams targeted to all receivers).
Data-rates up to 5 Mbit/s are supported in version 4.0.0.
Table B.33: High-speed Data Over Ethernet Connector
Item Specification
Safety status
Connector Type
Data-rates (bit/s)
Standards
De-encapsulation type
SELV
RJ-45 (100BaseT)
5 Mbit/s
ETSI EN 301 192 v.1.2.1 (1999-06), section 4
Data Piping (Proprietary)
Page B-22 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
B.7
Technical Specification
Frame Sync Connector
The Decoder can frame lock to an external video source. The frame information is input as a composite synchronous signal, with or without active video. The user can offset the sync to the video output by ±32,000 HD pixels, with a resolution of one pixel.
It is possible to connect multiple Receivers to the same reference signal. This input requires an external 75
Ω
termination.
Table B.34: Frame Sync Connector
Item Specification
Safety status
Connector type
SELV
BNC, Female
Connector designation
Pin: Centre
Frame Sync
Analogue Black and Burst Input
Shield Ground/Chassis
Analogue Composite Video
Table B.35: Analogue Video Output Connectors
Item Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
Video standards
Video level (luminance)
SELV
2 x BNC Female socket 75 Ω
CVBS 1
CVBS2
PAL – I, B, G, D
PAL – N
Combination PAL - N
PAL - M
NTSC-M (with and without pedestal) (set on Video Menu, 3.1)
1000 mV ± 30 mV
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-23
Technical Specification
Digital Video
Table B.36: Digital Video Output Connectors
Item Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
Output standard (USA)
SDI output level
Jitter Performance, Nominal
SELV
BNC, Female, 75 Ω
SDI 1
SDI 2
ANSI/SMPTE 292M
800 mV pk-pk nominal ± 10%
SMPTE Recommended Practices RP 192 –1996 Jitter Measurement
Procedures in Bit-Serial Digital Interfaces
Analogue and Digital audio are output on two, 9-way, male, D-type connectors.
Table B.37: Analogue and Digital Audio Output Connector
Item Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
Output level
Nominal output impedance
Load impedance
Compressions layers
Sampling rates
Output formats
SELV
2 x 9-Way D-type
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
+18 dBm nominal clipping level.
Selectable in range 12 to +24 dBm.
50 Ω
≥ 600 Ω
MPEG-2 layer 1 and 2, linear audio and Dolby Digital (AC-3)
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz
Analogue, AES3 and Dolby Digital AC-3
Page B-24
RS-232 Asynchronous (Low-speed) Data
Table B.38: RS-232 Asynchronous (Low-speed) Data Connector
Item Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
Data-rates (bit/s)
Standards
Line length
SELV
9-Way D-type
RS232/RS422 DATA OUT
1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19 200; 38 400
EIA RS-232C / ITU-T BT. V.24/V.28
< 15 metres
NOTE…
If the High-speed option (TT1260/HWO/HSDATA) is fitted, the Low-speed output is not available.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
B.8.4 RS-232/RS-485 Remote Control Connector
Table B.39: RS232/485 Control Connector
Item Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
SELV
9-way D-type, male
RCTRL RS-232/485
Technical Specification
This connector supports the following:
•
Ethernet High-speed Data Output Option (TT1260/HWO/HSETHER)
•
Telnet control sessions
•
SNMP control
•
Web Browser control.
Table B.40: SNMP Control Connector
Item Specification
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation
Standard
SELV
RJ-45 (100BaseT)
10/100BaseT
TANDBERG SNMP Control MIB
B.8.6 Transport Stream Output
Table B.41: Transport Stream Output Bitrates
CA System
Common Interface
TANDBERG Director
BISS
RAS 1 and 2
Setting
Encrypted
Partially Decrypted
Decrypted
Encrypted
Partially Decrypted
Decrypted
Encrypted
Partially Decrypted
Decrypted
Encrypted
Partially Decrypted
Decrypted
Input
160 Mbit/s
160 Mbit/s
66 Mbit/s
160 Mbit/s
160 Mbit/s
66 Mbit/s
160 Mbit/s
160 Mbit/s
66 Mbit/s
160 Mbit/s
160 Mbit/s
160 Mbit/s
Output
160 Mbit/s (TS Encrypted)
160 Mbit/s (TS Encrypted)
66 Mbit/s (Service in Clear)
160 Mbit/s (TS Encrypted)
160 Mbit/s (TS Encrypted)
66 Mbit/s (Service in Clear)
160 Mbit/s (TS Encrypted)
160 Mbit/s (TS Encrypted)
66 Mbit/s (Service in Clear)
160 Mbit/s (TS Encrypted)
160 Mbit/s (TS in Clear)
160 Mbit/s (TS in Clear)
Packet Lengths
The output is an MPEG-2 bitstream from the received services. The packet lengths input is
188/204/208; the output is always 188.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-25
Technical Specification
B.8.7 Summary Alarm Connector
Table B.42: Summary Relay Alarm Output Specification
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation:
Contact Configuration
Contact Rating
Maximum Switching Current
Maximum Switching Voltage
Maximum Switching Power
Minimum Switching Load
Specification
SELV
9-way D-type female
ALARM
SPDT (Change-over)
All volt-free contacts, fully isolated.
1A at 24 V d.c.
1A at 50 V a.c.
1A
50 V d.c. / 30 V a.c.
24 W / 60 VA
0.1 mA, 100 mVdc
B.8.8 Alarm Connector (TT1260/HWO/ALRM) [Option]
This is an optional card.
Table B.43: Relay Alarm Output Specification (TT1260/HWO/ALARM)
Item
Safety status
Connector type
Connector designation:
Contact Configuration
Contact Rating
Maximum Switching Current
Maximum Switching Voltage
Maximum Switching Power
Minimum Switching Load
Specification
SELV
25-way D-type female
ALARM RELAY
SPDT (Change-over)
All volt-free contacts, fully isolated.
1 A at 24 V d.c.
1 A at 50 V a.c.
1 A
50 Vdc / 30 V a.c.
24 W / 60 VA
0.1 mA, 100 mV d.c.
B.9 Environmental
B.9.1 Conditions
Table B.44: Environmental Conditions
Operational Specification
Temperature 0 ° C to +50 ° C ambient air temperature with free airflow
Humidity 0% to 95% (non-condensing)
Cooling requirements
Handling/movement
Convection cooling/free airflow
Fixed (non-mobile) use only
Page B-26 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Operational Specification
Storage/Transportation
Temperature -20 ° C to +70 ° C (-4 ° F to +158 ° F)
Humidity 0% to 95% (non-condensing)
B.9.2 Physical
Table B.45: Physical Parameters
Parameter Specification
Width
Depth
Rack mounting standard
Weight
442 mm (without rack fixing brackets)
482 mm (with rack fixing brackets)
350 mm (including connectors)
1U x 19-inch (1U ≡ 44.45 mm)
Weight 4.5 - 5.0 kg depending on configuration
Technical Specification
B.10.1 A.C. Mains Input
This equipment is fitted with a wide-ranging power supply. It is suitable for supply voltages of
100-240 Vac -10% +6% at 50/60 Hz nominal.
Table B.46: A.C. Power Supply Specification
Item Specification
Power distribution system
Connection to supply
Class of equipment
Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Voltage selection
Rated current
Input connector
Fuse
Fuse type
Fuse current rating
Power consumption
Type TN ONLY (EN 60950 para 1.2.12.1): Power distribution system having one point directly earthed, the exposed conductive parts of the installation being connected to that point by protective earth conductors. This equipment must NOT be used with single-phase three-wire and PE, TT or IT Type Power distribution systems.
Pluggable Equipment Type A (EN 60950 para 1.2.5): Equipment which is intended for connection to the building power supply wiring via a non-industrial plug and socket-outlet or a non-industrial appliance Coupler or both. Correct mains polarity must always be observed. Do not use reversible plugs with this equipment.
Class
I
Equipment (EN 60950 para 1.2.4): electric shock protection by basic insulation and protective earth.
100-240 Vac (single phase)
50/60 Hz
Wide-ranging
1.5 – 0.5 A (100-240 Vac range)
CEE 22/IEC 3-pin male receptacle
Fuse in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit. Do not use reversible plugs with this equipment.
Bussmann S505
Littelfuse 215
5x20 mm time delay (T) 1500 A breaking capacity (HBC)
IEC/EN 60127-2 Sheet 5
3.15 A 250 V T HBC
45 W typical (NO options fitted)
180 W maximum
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-27
Technical Specification
B.10.2 D.C. Supply Input (-48 Vdc Version)
NOTES...
1. Only models TT1260/CIBAS/48 and TT1260/DIRBAS/48 use a d.c. power supply.
2. Ensure correct polarity is maintained.
3. The unit must have a protective earth.
Table B.47: D.C. Power Supply Specification
Item Specification
Rated voltage
Rated current
Input connector
Fuse
Fuse type
Fuse current rating
Power consumption
For connection to –48 Vdc supplies only.
(PSU input tolerance –40 to –60 Vdc). Correct polarity must always be observed.
2 A
Terminal block
Fuse in –48 Vdc connector at rear of unit.
Bussmann S505
Littelfuse 215
5x20mm time delay (T) 1500A breaking capacity (HBC)
IEC/EN 60127-2 Sheet 5
5 A 250 V T HBC
45 W typical (NO options fitted)
180 W maximum
The signal cable types (or similar) in Table B.48
are those recommended by TANDBERG
Television in order to maintain product EMC compliance.
Table B.48: Suitable Signal Cable Types
Signal Type Connector Cable
RS-232/RS-422 Data Out 9-way D-type Male
Alarm Relay 9-way D-type Male
ASI/HDSDI Out 1 and 2
ASI/SMPTE 310 In
Frame Sync
BNC
BNC
BNC
Ethernet (100BaseT)
Audio 1 and 2
Video Out
RJ-45
9-way D-type Male to XLR
15-way D-type Male
Belden 8162 CM 2PR24 shielded E108998 (typical)
Belden 8162 CM 2PR24 shielded E108998 (typical)
Canford Audio BBC 1/3 PSF (type 2 video cable)
Canford Audio BBC 1/3 PSF (type 2 video cable)
Canford Audio BBC 1/3 PSF (type 2 video cable)
CAT 5E Data Cable S-FTP
Canford Audio Cable DST 110 Ω
Five-way screened Haurtian computer cable EL164535 ‘D’
Page B-28 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
B.12 Compliance
18
B.12.1 Safety
This equipment has been designed and tested to meet the requirements of the following:
EN 60950-1
IEC 60950-1
European
International
Information technology equipment - Safety.
Information technology equipment - Safety.
In addition, the equipment has been designed to meet the following:
UL 60950-1 USA Information Technology Equipment - Safety.
B.12.2 EMC
19
This equipment has been designed and tested to meet the following:
EN 55022 and
CISPR22
EN 61000-3-2
20
European
International
European
Emission Standard
Limits and methods of measurement of radio frequency interference characteristics of information technology equipment - Class A.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 3
Limits; Section 2. Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current
≤
16 A per phase).
EN 61000-3-3
20
European Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 3.
Limits; Section 3. Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current
≤
16 A.
EN 55024 European
FCC USA
Information technology equipment - Immunity characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement.
Conducted and radiated emission limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to the Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR) Title
47-Telecommunications, Part 15: Radio frequency devices, subpart B - Unintentional Radiators.
The CE mark is affixed to indicate compliance with the following directives:
89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility.
73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
1999/5/EC of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity. (If fitted with telecom type interface modules).
NOTE...
The CE mark was first affixed to this product in 2002.
18
The version of the standards shown is that applicable at the time of manufacture.
19
The EMC tests were performed with the Technical earth attached, and configured using recommended cables.
20
Applies only to models of the Product using a.c. power sources.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-29
Technical Specification
The C-Tick mark is affixed to denote compliance with the Australian Radiocommunications
(Compliance and Labelling – Incidental Emissions) Notice made under s.182 of
Radiocommunications Act 1992.
NOTE...
The C-Tick mark was first affixed to this product in 2002.
Page B-30
The outer carton and any cardboard inserts are made from 82% recycled material and are fully recyclable.
The Stratocell
or Ethafoam 220
polyethylene foam inserts can be easily recycled with other low density polyethylene (LDPE) materials.
The symbols printed on the outer carton are described below:
Handle with care
This way up
Fragile
Protect from moisture
See Section B.12.3
See Section B.12.4
Defines country of origin.
The packaging is reusable per GB 18455-2001
This symbol guarantees that packaging with this symbol is recyclable and will be accepted by cardboard recyclers
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Technical Specification
.
Recyclable per GB 18455-2001
TANDBERG Television products are designed and manufactured in keeping with good environmental practise. Our component and materials selection policy prohibits the use of a range of potentially hazardous materials. In addition, we comply with relevant environmental legislation.
For the European Union
For product sold into the EU after 1 st
July 2006, we comply with the EU RoHS Directive. We also comply with the WEEE Directive.
For China
For product sold into China after 1st March 2007, we comply with the “Administrative Measure on the Control of Pollution by Electronic Information Products”. In the first stage of this legislation, content of six hazardous materials has to be declared together with a statement of the “Environmentally Friendly Use Period (EFUP)”: the time the product can be used in normal service life without leaking the hazardous materials. TANDBERG Television expects the normal use environment to be in an equipment room at controlled temperatures (around 22°C) with moderate humidity (around 60%) and clean air, near sea level, not subject to vibration or shock.
Where TANDBERG Television product contains potentially hazardous materials, this is indicated on the product by the appropriate symbol containing the EFUP. For TANDBERG
Television products, the hazardous material content is limited to lead (Pb) in some solders.
This is extremely stable in normal use and the EFUP is taken as 50 years, by comparison with the EFUP given for Digital Exchange/Switching Platform in equipment in Appendix A of
“General Rule of Environment-Friendly Use Period of Electronic Information Products”. This is indicated by the product marking:
50
It is assumed that while the product is in normal use, any batteries associated with real-time clocks or battery-backed RAM will be replaced at the regular intervals.
The EFUP relates only to the environmental impact of the product in normal use, it does not imply that the product will continue to be supported for 50 years.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page B-31
Technical Specification
General
Dispose of this equipment safely at the end of its life. Local codes and/or environmental restrictions may affect its disposal. Regulations, policies and/or environmental restrictions differ throughout the world. Contact your local jurisdiction or local authority for specific advice on disposal.
For the European Union
"This product is subject to the EU Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) and should not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste."
B.12.9 Recycling
TANDBERG Television provides assistance to customers and recyclers through our web site http://www.tandbergtv.com/ProductRecycling.ink
Please contact TANDBERG Television’s customer services for assistance with recycling if this site does not show the information you require.
Where it is not possible to return the product to TANDBERG Television or its agents for recycling, the following general information may be of assistance:
•
Before attempting disassembly, ensure the product is completely disconnected from power and signal connections.
•
All major parts are marked or labelled to show their material content.
•
Depending on the date of manufacture, this product may contain lead in solder.
•
Some circuit boards may contain battery-backed memory devices.
Page B-32 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Annex C
C.
Menus
Contents
LCD Menus ...................................................... C-3
Using the Menus ................................... C-3
Menu Descriptions ................................ C-3
Main Menus...................................................... C-3
The Menu Structure ......................................... C-4
Presets Menu (Menu 1).................................... C-5
Input Menu (Menu 2) ........................................ C-5
ASI Input Option (TT1260/HWO/ASI) ... C-5
C.5.2
QPSK Satellite Option
(TT1260/HWO/QPSK) .......................... C-5
C.5.3
QPSK/ASI Input Option
(TT1260/HWO/QPSK/ASI).................... C-7
C.5.4
TTV G.703 Input Option
(TT1260/HWO/G703)............................ C-8
C.5.5
10/100BaseT IP Input Option
(TT1260/HWO/IP) ................................. C-9
C.5.6
ATM AAL-1 E3 Input Option
(TT1260/HW0/ATM-E3) ........................ C-9
C.5.7
ATM AAL-1 DS3 Input Option
(TT1260/HW0/ATM-DS3) ................... C-10
C.5.8
COFDM Input Option
(TT1260/HWO/COFDM678) ............... C-11
C.5.9
Higher Order Modulation Input Option
(TT1260/HWO/HOM) .......................... C-12
C.5.10
DVB-S2 Input Option
(TT1260/HWO/DVBS2,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C) ......... C-13
C.5.11
PRO MPEG FEC Input Option
(TT1260/HWO/PROFEC) ................... C-16
Service Menu (Menu 3) .................................. C-17
Service Status Menu (Menu 3)............ C-17
Video Menu (Menu 3.1) ...................... C-17
Audio 1 Menu (Menu 3.2) ................... C-19
Audio 2 Menu (Menu 3.3) ................... C-19
Async Data Menu (Menu 3.4) ............. C-20
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Sync Data Option Menu (Menu 3.4) .... C-20
Ethernet Data Menu (Menu 3.5).......... C-21
Teletext Menu (Menu 3.6) ................... C-21
VBI Menu (Menu 3.7) .......................... C-22
PCR PID Menu (Menu 3.8) ................. C-23
Network ID Menu (Menu 3.9) .............. C-23
TTV Private Data (Menu 3.10) ............ C-23
CA Menu (Menu 4) ......................................... C-24
Alarms Menu (Menu 5) ................................... C-25
System Menus................................................ C-26
System Overview Menu (Menu 6) ....... C-26
Setup Menu (Menu 6.1) ...................... C-26
IRD Details Menu (Menu 6.2).............. C-27
System Restart Menu (Menu 6.3) ....... C-27
List of Figures
Figure C.1: Menu Structure...................................................C-4
List of Tables
Table C.1: Main Menu Items.................................................C-3
Table C.2: Presets Menu ......................................................C-5
Table C.3: ASI IP Menu ........................................................C-5
Table C.4: QPSK Satellite Menu ..........................................C-5
Table C.5: QPSK/ASI IP Menu .............................................C-7
Table C.6: TTV G.703 Menu.................................................C-8
Table C.7: IP Input Menu ......................................................C-9
Table C.8: ATM AAL-1 E3 Input Menu .................................C-9
Table C.9: ATM AAL-1 DS3 Input Menu.............................C-10
Table C.10: COFDM678 Menu ...........................................C-11
Table C.11: Higher-order Modulation Input Menu...............C-12
Table C.12: DVB-S2 Input Menu ........................................C-13
Table C.13: DVB-S2/ASI/IF/C Input Menu..........................C-16
Table C.14: PRO MPEG FEC Input Menu..........................C-16
Table C.15: Service Menu ..................................................C-17
Table C.16: Video Menu .....................................................C-17
Table C.17: Audio 1 Menu ..................................................C-19
Table C.18: Audio 2 Menu ..................................................C-19
Table C.19: Async Data Menu ............................................C-20
Page C-1
Menus
Table C.20: Sync Data Menu ............................................. C-21
Table C.21: High Speed Data Over Ethernet Menu ........... C-21
Table C.22: Teletext Menu ................................................. C-21
Table C.23: VBI Menu ........................................................ C-22
Table C.24: PCR PID Menu ............................................... C-23
Table C.25: Network ID Menu ............................................ C-23
Table C.26: Network ID Menu ............................................ C-23
Table C.27: CA Menu......................................................... C-24
Table C.28: Alarm Status Menu ......................................... C-25
Table C.29: System Overview Menu.................................. C-26
Table C.30: Setup Menu .................................................... C-26
Table C.31: IRD Details Menu............................................ C-27
Table C.32: System Restart Menu ..................................... C-27
Page C-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Menus
C.1.1 Using the Menus
Detailed description of the use of menus is given in Chapter 3, Operating the Equipment
Locally .
This annex describes the front panel LCD menus.
When the unit is first powered up, it progresses through a series of start-up pages on the LCD display.
The menu is created in a tree structure, where each branch may contain items, new branches, or both.
An item is viewed as an information string on the left side of the LCD, with an editable or selectable item on the right side, or an information string.
A path to a new sub branch is viewed as an information string on the left side of the LCD, where the string starts with a > character. The > symbolises the arrow pushbutton to press, to enter the submenu.
The main menus correspond to the main functional areas of the IRD. Each menu contains submenus for displaying and editing IRD settings, as detailed in this chapter.
Table C.1: Main Menu Items
Menu # Display Title Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
Presets
Input
Service
CA
Alarms
System
See Section
Display and editing of preset receiver settings. C.4
Display and editing of Input Card settings. C.5
Display and editing of video, audio, data, teletext and VBI settings. C.6
Display and editing of Conditional Access settings. C.7
Display and editing of Alarm settings.
Display and editing of operating modes and system settings.
C.8
C.9
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-3
Menus
C.3 The Menu Structure
1. PRESETS
1.1 SAVE
2. INPUT (COFDM shown)
1
2.1 INPUT QUALITY MER BARGRAPH
2.1.1 P-V BER BARGRAPH
POST ERRORS
2.2 INPUT SOURCE
2.3 INPUT CHANNEL
2.4 HIERARCHY STREAM
2.5 FEC RATE
2.6 MODULATION MODE
4. CA (Common Interface shown) 2
4.1 RAS MODE/RAS KEY
2
4.2 SIGNAL PROTECTION
4.3 COMMON INTERFACE
4.4 DIRECTOR 5 STATUS
4.5 DIRECTOR
4.6 BISS MODE/KEY SETUP
4.7 PROVIDER LOCK/PROVIDER ID
4.8 TRANSPORT STREAM OUTPUT
5. ALARMS 1
5.1 MER ALARM SETUP
5.2 BER ALARM SETUP
5.3 TRANSPORT STREAM ALARM SETUP
5.4 VIDEO ALARM SETUP
5.5 AUDIO ALARM SETUP
5.6 AUDIO2 ALARM SETUP
5.7 TEMP ALARM SETUP
6. SYSTEM
6.1 OPERATING MODE
6.1.6 RESTORE SYSTEM DEFAULTS
6.2 SOFTWARE VERSION
6.3 RESTART
Figure C.1: Menu Structure
Page C-4
3. SERVICE
3.1 VIDEO
3.1.3 RATE BUFFER LEVEL/BITRATE
3.1.5 DEFAULT LINE STANDARD/FAIL MODE
3.1.8 FSYNC PAL/NTSC OFFSET
3.1.13 LINE/EDH
3.1.15 BLANK ON VIDEO RESTART
3.1.16 LINE 23 BLANK (625 ONLY)
3.3 AUDIO2
DATA
2
3.4.2 DVB ASYNC BAUD RATE
3.4.3 USER ASYNC DATA FORMAT
3.6 TELETEXT
3.7 VBI
3.7.4 VITC 525/625 LINES
3.8 PCR
3.9 NETWORK ID/ORIGINAL NETWORK
3.10 TTV PRIVATE DATA
NOTES:
1 Menus dependant on input card fitted.
2 Menu dependant on model type.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
C.4 Presets Menu (Menu 1)
The Presets menu contains up to 40 editable preset numbers in the range 01 – 40. Selecting a numbered Service via the Presets menu automatically reconfigures the input of the IRD.
Each preset can have a selected language, network name and service provider associated with it.
Table C.2: Presets Menu
Menus
Menu #
1
1.1
Display Title: PRESETS
SELECT #YY of 40
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SAVE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX as #YY of 40
Description
YY is the editable preset number in the range 01 – 40 .
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is the stored preset service name.
Where XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is the current service name from the SDT.
YY is the EDITABLE preset number in the range 01 – 40 .
C.5 Input Menu (Menu 2)
C.5.1 ASI Input Option (TT1260/HWO/ASI)
When an ASI Input interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to select the transport stream source.
Table C.3: ASI IP Menu
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1 SELECT SOURCE X
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or
NOT LOCKED )
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
X is the editable input source selection 1 , 2 or AUTO
C.5.2 QPSK Satellite Option (TT1260/HWO/QPSK)
When a QPSK Input interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the QPSK parameters.
Table C.4: QPSK Satellite Menu
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1 PV BER -1 -3 -5
1.0 E-8 XXXXXXXXXXX
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or
NOT LOCKED )
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
XXXXXXXXXXX is a bar-graph indicating the current level of PV
BER (10 x -1 to –5 range)
XXX.X is a measure of the signal-to-noise ratio (first X is + or -)
XXX.X dB
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-5
Menus
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2.1.2
2.2
2.3
PreBER -1 -3 -5
1.0 E-8 XXXXXXXXXXX
SELECT SOURCE X
LNB FREQUENCY
XXXXX.X MHz
XXXXX.X MHz
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
XXXX XXXX
2.3.4 LNB POWER XXXXXXX
At YYY
2.3.5
2.4
LNB 22 kHz
XXXXXXXX
XXXXX kHz
LNB FREQUENCY
XXXXX.X MHz
XXXXX.X MHz
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
XXXX XXXX
2.4.4 LNB POWER XXXXXXX
At YYY
2.4.5 LNB 22 kHz
XXXXXXXX
XXXXX kHz
Description
XXXXXXXXXXX is a bar-graph indicating the current level of previterbi BER (10 x -1 to –5 range)
X is the EDITABLE input source selection 1 or 2
Sets the LNB frequency for Source 1. XXXXX.X is the LNB frequency in MHz
Sets the Satellite frequency for Source 1. XXXXX.X is the Satellite frequency in MHz
Sets the symbol rate for Source 1.
XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2 ,
2/3 , 3/4 , 5/6 , 7/8 ) for Source 1. The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
XXXXXXX sets the LNB power for Source 1 ( ON , OFF ,
BOOSTED ) BOOSTED provides 1V extra power over the ON setting
YYY selects the rating of the power output
( 18v – Horiz , 13v – Vert )
XXXXXXXX enables or disables LNB 22 kHz control tone for
Source 1 ( ON or OFF )
Sets the centre frequency search range for Source 1. XXXXX is the search range in kHz
Sets the LNB frequency for Source 2. XXXXX.X is the LNB frequency in MHz
Sets the Satellite frequency for Source 2. XXXXX.X is the Satellite frequency in MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for Source 2.
XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2 ,
2/3 , 3/4 , 5/6 , 7/8 ) for Source 2. The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
XXXXXXX sets the LNB power for Source 2 ( ON , OFF ,
BOOSTED ) BOOSTED provides 1V extra power over the ON setting
YYY selects the rating of the power output
( 18v – Horiz , 13v – Vert )
XXXXXXXX enables or disables LNB 22 kHz control tone for
Source 2 ( ON or OFF )
Sets the centre frequency search range for Source 2. XXXXX is the search range in kHz
Page C-6 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
C.5.3 QPSK/ASI Input Option (TT1260/HWO/QPSK/ASI)
When a QPSK/ASI Input interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to select the source and edit QPSK parameters.
Table C.5: QPSK/ASI IP Menu
Menus
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1 PV BER -1 -3 -5
1.0 E-8 XXXXXXXXXXX
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or
NOT LOCKED )
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
XXXXXXXXXXX is a bar-graph indicating the current level of PV
BER (10 x -1 to –5 range)
XXX.X is a measure of the signal-to-noise ratio (first X is + or -)
2.1.2
2.2
2.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.4
XXX.X dB
PreBER -1 -3 -5
1.0 E-8 XXXXXXXXXXX
SELECT SOURCE X
LNB FREQUENCY
XXXXX.X MHz
XXXXX.X MHz
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
XXXX XXXX
LNB POWER XXXXXXX
At YYY
LNB 22 kHz
XXXXXXXX
XXXXX kHz
LNB FREQUENCY
XXXXX.X MHz
XXXXX.X MHz
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
XXXX XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX is a bar-graph indicating the current level of previterbi BER (10 x -1 to –5 range)
X is the EDITABLE input source selection ( RF 1, 2 ASI 3, 4)
Sets the LNB frequency for Source 1. XXXXX.X is the LNB frequency in MHz.
Sets the Satellite frequency for Source 1. XXXXX.X is the Satellite frequency in MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for Source 1.
XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s.
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2 ,
2/3 , 3/4 , 5/6 , 7/8 ) for Source 1. The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
XXXXXXX sets the LNB power for Source 1 ( ON , OFF ,
BOOSTED ) BOOSTED provides 1V extra power over the ON setting
YYY selects the rating of the power output
( 18v – Horiz , 13v – Vert )
XXXXXXXX enables or disables LNB 22 kHz control tone for
Source 1 ( ON or OFF )
Sets the centre frequency search range for Source 1. XXXXX is the search range in kHz
Sets the LNB frequency for Source 2. XXXXX.X is the LNB frequency in MHz
Sets the Satellite frequency for Source 2. XXXXX.X is the Satellite frequency in MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for Source 2.
XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s.
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2 ,
2/3 , 3/4 , 5/6 , 7/8 ) for Source 2. The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-7
Menus
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2.4.4 LNB POWER XXXXXXX
At YYY
2.4.5 LNB 22 kHz
XXXXXXXX
Description
XXXXXXX sets the LNB power for Source 2 ( ON , OFF ,
BOOSTED ) BOOSTED provides 1V extra power over the ON setting
YYY selects the rating of the power output
( 18v – Horiz , 13v – Vert )
XXXXXXXX enables or disables LNB 22 kHz control tone for
Source 2 ( ON or OFF )
Sets the centre frequency search range for Source 2. XXXXX is the search range in kHz
XXXXX kHz
C.5.4 TTV G.703 Input Option (TT1260/HWO/G703)
When a TTV G.703
input interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the set up parameters.
Table C.6: TTV G.703 Menu
Menu # Display Title: Input
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1 PDH RATE
XXXXX
STUFFING PKTS YYYY
2.1.2 REGULATION
XXXXX
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or
NOT LOCKED )
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
XXXXX is the editable framing mode of the TTV G.703 input module ( NONE , C-BIT , M13 )
XXXX is the editable randomisation ( ACTIVE , NOT ACTIVE )
YYYY is the editable stuffing packets ( PRESENT , NOT
PRESENT )
XXXX displays the regulation
XXXX displays the signal status
XXXXX
XXXX displays the software version number
XXXXX
XXXX displays the hardware version number
2.2
XXXXX
REED-SOLOMON DECODER
XXXXX
2.2.1 INTERLEAVER
XXX
XXXXX is the editable Reed-Solomon option ( DISABLED ,
ENABLED )
XXX.X is the editable Interleaver option ( DISABLED , ENABLED )
XXXX is the editable signal level option ( NORMAL , LOW )
XXXX
Page C-8 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
C.5.5 10/100BaseT IP Input Option (TT1260/HWO/IP)
When a 10/100BaseT input interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the set up parameters.
Table C.7: IP Input Menu
Menus
Menu # Display title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1 LAST IP RECEIVED FROM
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or NOT LOCKED )
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the IP address the last
MPEG-2 packet was received from
YYYY ( UDP ONLY , RTP ONLY , RTP FEC MODE )
2.1.2
YYYY
XXXX XXXX status ( NO DATA , LINK DOWN , OUT OF
REGULATION )
XXXX displays the software version number
2.2
XXXX
UDP PORT NUMBER
XXXXX
2.2.4
2.2.5
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
MULTICAST IP ADDRESS
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
ETHERNET LINE MODE
XX
XXXXX shows the editable UDP Port Number on which the
IP Input Card is listening for packets
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the editable IP address of the
IP input card
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the editable subnet mask of the IP input card
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the editable gateway address of the IP input card
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the editable multicast
IP address of the IP input card
XX is the editable line mode ( AUTO or FULL DUPLEX )
C.5.6 ATM AAL-1 E3 Input Option (TT1260/HW0/ATM-E3)
When an ATM AAL-1 E3 input interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the set up parameters.
Table C.8: ATM AAL-1 E3 Input Menu
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1
2.1.1
INPUT ATM RATE XXXXX
MPEG RATE YYYYY
INPUT PACKET LENGTH XXX
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or NOT
LOCKED )
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
XXXXX is the input ATM rate in Cell/s
YYYYY is the INPUT MPEG rate in bit/s
XXX is the input packet length ( 188 , 204 )
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-9
Menus
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2.1.2 XXXX
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
VPI XXX VCI YYYYY
ZZZZZZZZ
CELL DISCARD XX
SET HEC CORRECTION YYY
STATUS PACKET LENGTH XXX
Description
XXXX is a status display of the following alarms for the input
“OORG ” = ATM_RX_OUT_OF_REGULATION
“SQNI ” = ATM_SEQ_NUM_INVALID
“MSCL ” = ATM_MISSING_CELLS
“RALM ” = ATM_PDH_REMOTE_ALARM
“LALM ” = ATM_PDH_LOCAL_ALARM
“SGLO ” = ATM_PDH_G703_SIG_LOST
“FMLO ” = ATM_PDH_FRAMING_LOST
“HSLO ” = ATM_HEC_SYNC_LOST
“MSLO ” = ATM_MPEG_SYNC_LOST
XXX is the virtual paths
YYYYY is the virtual channels
ZZZZZZZZ is the setting of descrambling (PAYLOAD
DESCRAMBLE
XXX is the setting of the Cell Discard ( ENABLE or DISABLE )
YYY is the setting of the HEC Correction ( ENABLE or DISABLE )
XXX is the status packet length ( 188 , 204 )
C.5.7 ATM AAL-1 DS3 Input Option (TT1260/HW0/ATM-DS3)
When an ATM AAL-1 DS3 input interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the set up parameters.
Table C.9: ATM AAL-1 DS3 Input Menu
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
INPUT ATM RATE XXXXX
MPEG RATE YYYYY
INPUT PACKET LENGTH XXX
XXXX
VPI XXX VCI YYYYY
ZZZZZZZZ
CELL DISCARD XX
SET HEC CORRECTION YYY
STATUS PACKET LENGTH XXX
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or NOT
LOCKED )
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
XXXXX is the input ATM rate in Cell/s
YYYYY is the INPUT MPEG rate in bit/s
XXX is the input packet length ( 188 , 204 )
XXXX is a status display of the following alarms for the input
“OORG ” = ATM_RX_OUT_OF_REGULATION
“SQNI ” = ATM_SEQ_NUM_INVALID
“MSCL ” = ATM_MISSING_CELLS
“RALM ” = ATM_PDH_REMOTE_ALARM
“LALM ” = ATM_PDH_LOCAL_ALARM
“SGLO ” = ATM_PDH_G703_SIG_LOST
“FMLO ” = ATM_PDH_FRAMING_LOST
“HSLO ” = ATM_HEC_SYNC_LOST
“MSLO ” = ATM_MPEG_SYNC_LOST
XXX is the virtual paths
YYYYY is the virtual channels
ZZZZZZZZ is the setting of descrambling (PAYLOAD
DESCRAMBLE
XXX is the setting of the Cell Discard ( ENABLE or DISABLE )
YYY is the setting of the HEC Correction ( ENABLE or DISABLE )
XXX is the status packet length ( 188 , 204 )
Page C-10 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
C.5.8 COFDM Input Option (TT1260/HWO/COFDM678)
When a COFDM interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the parameters.
Menus
Table C.10: COFDM678 Menu
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or
NOT LOCKED ).
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
Displays the Message Error Rate bar-graph (0 to 64 range)
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2
MER 0 32 64
--.-- XXXXXXXXXXX
P-V BER -1 -3 -5
--.-- XXXXXXXXXXX
POST RS ERRORS
XXX
INPUT
VV
Displays the Bit Error Rate bar-graph (10 x -1 to –5 range)
XXX displays the number of post Reed-Solomon errors
VV is the editable input source selection ( IF 70 MHz or RF )
WWWW is the editable guard interval ( 1 /
4
, 1 /
8
, 1 /
16
, 1 /
32
)
WWWW
XX is the editable carrier mode ( 2K or 8K )
XX
2.2.3 SPECTRUM
YYYYYY
2.2.4 AUTO DETECT ZZZZZZ
2.3
2.3.1
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY VVVVV.VVV MHz
BAND PLAN
WWWW
YYYYYY is the editable selection of spectrum ( INVERTED or
NORMAL )
ZZZZZZ is the editable selection of input source:
DISABLED – no automatic detection of input source
ENABLED – enables auto detection and configuration of TIME
OUT (in seconds)
VVVVV.VVV
is the editable selection of channel frequency
(in MHz)
WWWW is the editable selection of band plan of the country
( NONE , UK, CCIR , USA , Japan , France, French 0v.PTA
, South
Africa , Ireland , OIRT , China , New Zealand , Morocco , Italy ,
Europe CATV , Europe VHF , or Australia )
XX displays channel space (in MHz)
X MHz
YYY displays step size (in kHz)
YYY kHz
ZZZZZ.ZZZ displays Local Oscillator frequency (in MHz)
2.4
2.5
2.6
ZZZZZ.ZZZ MHz
HIERARCHY STREAM XXX
HIERARCHY
FEC RATE XXX
MODULATION MODE
XXX
XXX is the editable selection of hierarchy stream ( LOW , HIGH or
OFF)
XXX displays Forward Error Correction Rate
XXX displays input modulation mode
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-11
Menus
C.5.9 Higher Order Modulation Input Option (TT1260/HWO/HOM)
When a higher-order modulation interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the parameters.
Table C.11: Higher-order Modulation Input Menu
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1
2.1.1
2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
PV BER -1 -3 -5
1.0 E-8 XXXXXXXXXXX
Eb/N0 MARGIN XXX.X
SELECT SOURCE XX
LNB RR
SATELLITE FREQUENCY SS
SYMBOL RATE TT
MODULATION FEC UU
INPUT GAIN VV
ROLL OFF XX
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
LNB POWER XX
LNB 22 kHz YY
SEARCH RANGE ZZ
LNB RR
SATELLITE FREQUENCY SS
SYMBOL RATE TT
MODULATION FEC UU
INPUT GAIN VV
ROLL OFF XX
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
LNB POWER XX
LNB 22 kHz YY
SEARCH RANGE ZZ
LNB RR
SATELLITE FREQUENCY SS
SYMBOL RATE TT
MODULATION FEC UU
INPUT GAIN VV
ROLL OFF XX
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
LNB POWER XX
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or NOT
LOCKED ).
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
XXXXXXXXXXX is a bar-graph indicating the current level of Pre-
Viterbi BER (10 x -1 to –5 range)
XXX.X is a measure of the signal-to-noise ratio (first X is + or -)
XX is 1 , 2 , 3 or 4
RR is the LNB frequency in MHz for Source 1
SS is the satellite frequency in MHz for Source 1
TT is the symbol rate in MSym/s for Source 1
UU is the modulation mode ( QPSK , 8PSK or 16QAM ) for Source 1
VV is the input gain ( HIGH or LOW ) for Source 1
XX is the spectral roll off (%) for Source 1
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 1
XX is the LNB power ( ON , OFF or BOOSTED ) for Source 1
YY is the Low Noise Block ( ENABLE or DISABLE ) for Source 1
ZZ is the search range in kHz for Source 1
RR is the LNB frequency in MHz for Source 2
SS is the satellite frequency in MHz for Source 2
TT is the symbol rate in MSym/s for Source 2
UU is the modulation mode ( QPSK , 8PSK or 16QAM ) for Source 2
VV is the input gain ( HIGH or LOW ) for Source 2
XX is the spectral roll off (%) for Source 2
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 2
XX is the LNB power ( ON , OFF or BOOSTED ) for Source 2
YY is the Low Noise Block ( ENABLE or DISABLE ) for Source 2
ZZ is the search range in kHz for Source 2
RR is the LNB frequency in MHz for Source 3
SS is the satellite frequency in MHz for Source 3
TT is the symbol rate in MSym/s for Source 3
UU is the modulation mode ( QPSK , 8PSK or 16QAM ) for Source 3
VV is the input gain ( HIGH or LOW ) for Source 3
XX is the spectral roll off (%) for Source 3
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 3
XX is the LNB power ( ON , OFF or BOOSTED ) for Source 3
Page C-12 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
2.6.7
2.6.8
2.6.9
2.7
2.8
2.9
Menu # Display Title: INPUT
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
LNB 22 kHz YY
SEARCH RANGE ZZ
LNB RR
SATELLITE FREQUENCY SS
SYMBOL RATE TT
MODULATION FEC UU
INPUT GAIN VV
ROLL OFF XX
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
LNB POWER XX
LNB 22 kHz YY
SEARCH RANGE ZZ
SOFTWARE VERSION XX
FIRMWARE VERSION XX
HARDWARE VERSION XX
Menus
Description
YY is the Low Noise Block ( ENABLE or DISABLE ) for Source 3
ZZ is the search range in kHz for Source 3
RR is the LNB frequency in MHz for Source 4
SS is the satellite frequency in MHz for Source 4
TT is the symbol rate in MSym/s for Source 4
UU is the modulation mode ( QPSK , 8PSK or 16QAM ) for Source 4
VV is the input gain ( HIGH or LOW ) for Source 4
XX is the spectral roll off (%) for Source 4
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 4
XX is the LNB power ( ON , OFF or BOOSTED ) for Source 4
YY is the Low Noise Block ( ENABLE or DISABLE ) for Source 4
ZZ is the search range in kHz for Source 4 xx is the software version number for the input card xx is the firmware version number for the input card xx is the hardware version number for the input card
C.5.10 DVB-S2 Input Option (TT1260/HWO/DVBS2,
TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI, TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C)
When a DVB-S2 interface is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the parameters. The menus displayed differ depending on whether the ASI/IF/C option is fitted, see
Table C.12: DVB-S2 Input Menu
Menu # Display Title: Input
2
2.1
2.1.2
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
Description
WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
PV BER -1 -3 -5
1.0 E-8 XXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXX is a bar-graph indicating the current level of
Pre-Viterbi BER (10 x -1 to –5 range)
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB AAAAAA is the DVB standard
CCCCCCCC DDDDDDDD BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB indicates the PILOT SYMBOLS
( ON / OFF ) when locked
CCCCCCCC indicates the Modulation
DDDDDDDD indicates the FEC
AAAAAA BBBBBBBBBB EEEE
CCCCCCCC DDDDDD FFFFFF
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or
NOT LOCKED ).
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
STATUS XX
C/N YY
C/N MARGIN ZZ
AAAAAA is the DVB standard
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB indicates FRAME LENGTH ( SHORT or
NORMAL ) when locked
CCCCCCCC indicates the Modulation
DDDDDD indicates the FEC
EEEE indicates SPECTRAL SENSE and FFFFFF is ( NORMAL ,
INV or AUTO ) when locked.
XX is the status
YY is the estimated carrier to noise ratio in dB
ZZ is the estimated carrier to noise ratio margin to failure in dB
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-13
Menus
Page C-14
Menu # Display Title: Input
2.1.5
2.2
SIGNAL LEVEL XX
SELECT SOURCE XX
2.3 LNB FREQUENCY
XXXXX.X MHz
XXXXX.X MHz
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
XXXX XXXX
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.4
ROLL OFF VV
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
SEARCH RANGE WW
CONSTELLATION MODE
LNB POWER YY
LNB 22 kHz ZZ
LNB FREQUENCY
XXXXX.X MHz
XXXXX.X MHz
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
XXXX XXXX
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.5
2.5.3
ROLL OFF VV
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
SEARCH RANGE WW
CONSTELLATION MODE
LNB POWER YY
LNB 22 kHz ZZ
LNB FREQUENCY
XXXXX.X MHz
XXXXX.X MHz
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
MODULATION FEC
Description
XX is the signal level
XX is 1 , 2 , 3 or 4 for TT1260/HWO/DVBS2
XX is 1 , 2 , 3 , IF , ASI 1 or ASI 2 for TT1260/HWO/DVBS2/ASI/IF/C
Sets the LNB frequency for Source 1. XXXXX.X is the LNB frequency in MHz.
Sets the Satellite frequency for Source 1. XXXXX.X is the Satellite frequency in MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for Source 1.
XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s.
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2 ,
2/3 , 3/4 , 5/6 , 7/8 ) for Source 1. The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
VV is the spectral roll off ( 35% , 25% , 20% ) for Source 1
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 1
WW is the search range in kHz for Source 1
Hardware option ASI/IS/C ( OPTION NOT FITTED if not fitted) for
Source 1
YY is the LNB power ( ON , OFF or BOOSTED ) for Source 1
ZZ is the Low Noise Block ( ENABLE or DISABLE) for Source 1
Sets the LNB frequency for Source 2. XXXXX.X is the LNB frequency in MHz.
Sets the Satellite frequency for Source 2. XXXXX.X is the Satellite frequency in MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for Source 2.
XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s.
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2 ,
2/3 , 3/4 , 5/6 , 7/8 ) for Source 2. The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
VV is the spectral roll off ( 35% , 25% , 20% ) for Source 2
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 2
WW is the search range in kHz for Source 2
Hardware option ASI/IS/C ( OPTION NOT FITTED if not fitted) for
Source 2
YY is the LNB power ( ON , OFF or BOOSTED ) for Source 2
ZZ is the Low Noise Block ( ENABLE or DISABLE) for Source 2
Sets the LNB frequency for Source 3. XXXXX.X is the LNB frequency in MHz.
Sets the Satellite frequency for Source 3. XXXXX.X is the Satellite frequency in MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for Source 3. XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s.
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2,
2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 ) for Source 3. The FEC selection is limited to the
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Menus
Menu #
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.5.6
2.5.7
2.5.8
2.5.9
2.6
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.6.7
2.6.8
2.6.9
2.7
2.8
2.9
Display Title: Input
XXXX XXXX
ROLL OFF VV
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
SEARCH RANGE WW
CONSTELLATION MODE
LNB POWER YY
LNB 22 kHz ZZ
LNB FREQUENCY
XXXXX.X MHz
XXXXX.X MHz
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
XXXX XXXX
ROLL OFF VV
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
SEARCH RANGE WW
CONSTELLATION MODE
LNB POWER YY
LNB 22 kHz ZZ
HARDWARE NUMBER XX
HARDWARE VERSION XX
FIRMWARE VERSION XX
Description valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
VV is the spectral roll off ( 35%, 25%, 20% ) for Source 3
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 3
WW is the search range in kHz for Source 3
Hardware option ASI/IS/C ( OPTION NOT FITTED if not fitted) for
Source 3
YY is the LNB power ( ON , OFF or BOOSTED ) for Source 3
ZZ is the Low Noise Block ( ENABLE or DISABLE ) for Source 3
Sets the LNB frequency for Source 4. XXXXX.X is the LNB frequency in MHz.
Sets the Satellite frequency for Source 4. XXXXX.X is the Satellite frequency in MHz.
Sets the symbol rate for Source 4. XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s.
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2,
2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 ) for Source 4. The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
VV is the spectral roll off ( 35%, 25%, 20% ) for Source 4
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 4
WW is the search range in kHz for Source 4
Hardware option ASI/IS/C ( OPTION NOT FITTED if not fitted) for
Source 4
YY is the LNB power ( ON , OFF or BOOSTED ) for Source 4
ZZ is the Low Noise Block ( ENABLE or DISABLE ) for Source 4 xx is the hardware number for the input card xx is the hardware version for the input card xx is the firmware version for the input card
When a DVB-S/ASI/IF/C option is fitted, input 4 provides different menu options as detailed in
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-15
Menus
Table C.13: DVB-S2/ASI/IF/C Input Menu
Menu #
2, 2.1, 2.2,
2.3, 2.4, 2.5
2.6
Display Title: Input
I/F FREQUENCY
XX.XXXXXX Msymb/s
XXXX XXXX
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.7, 2.8, 2.9
ROLL OFF VV
SPECTRUM SENSE WW
SEARCH RANGE WW
CONSTELLATION MODE
Description
As described in table above (
Sets the symbol rate for Source 4. XX.XXXXXX is the symbol rate in Msymb/s.
XXXX sets the modulation type (QPSK) and XXXX the FEC ( 1/2,
2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 ) for Source 4. The FEC selection is limited to the valid values of the currently selected modulation type. For AUTO
FEC, the Receiver searches for and locks to the correct FEC rate for the received carrier.
VV is the spectral roll off ( 35%, 25%, 20% ) for Source 4
WW is the spectrum sense ( NORMAL , INVERTED or AUTO ) for
Source 4
WW is the search range in kHz for Source 4
Hardware option ASI/IS/C ( OPTION NOT FITTED FOR
HWO/DVBS2) for Source 4
As described in table above (
C.5.11 PRO MPEG FEC Input Option (TT1260/HWO/PROFEC)
When a PRO MPEG FEC input option is used, the Input menu allows the user to edit the set-up parameters.
Table C.14: PRO MPEG FEC Input Menu
Menu # Display title: INPUT
2 WWWWWWWWWW ZZZ TID XXXXX
Bitrate YYY.YY Mbit/s
2.1 LAST IP RECEIVED FROM
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
Description
WWWWWWWWWW is the transport lock status ( LOCKED or NOT LOCKED )
XXXXX is the transport stream ID
YYY.YY is the transport stream rate in Mbit/s
ZZZ is the packet byte length of the current TS ( 188 , 204 )
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the IP address the last
MPEG-2 packet was received from
YYYY ( UDP ONLY , RTP ONLY , RTP FEC MODE )
2.1.3
YYYY
2.1.2 COLUMNS
ROWS
IP PACKETS RECEIVED
XXXX
XXXX displays the number of IP packets received
XXXX displays the number of IP packets corrected
2.1.5
2.1.6
XXXX
LOST PACKET COUNT
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX displays the number of IP packets lost
2.1.7
2.1.8
XXXX
SOFTWARE VERSION
XXXX displays the status ( NO DATA , LINK DOWN , OUT
OF REGULATION )
XXXX displays the status ( WRONG FEC FORMAT ,
HEADER ERR , PACKET LOST )
XXXX displays the software version number
Page C-16 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Menu # Display title: INPUT
2.1.9
XXXX
CLEAR STATISTICS
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
UDP PORT NUMBER
XXXXX
IP INPUT ADDRESS
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
IP INPUT SUBNET MASK
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
IP INPUT GATEWAY ADDRESS
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
IP INPUT MULTICAST IP ADD
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX
ETHERNET LINE MODE
XX
Description
Initiates a reset of the packet tracking menus 2.1.3, 2.1.4, and 2.1.5.
XXXXX shows the editable UDP Port Number on which the
IP Input Card is listening for packets
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the editable IP address of the
IP input card
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the editable subnet mask of the IP input card
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the editable gateway address of the IP input card
XXXX.XXXX.XXXX.XXXX is the editable multicast IP address of the IP input card
XX is the editable line mode ( AUTO or 100 FULL
DUPLEX )
Menus
C.6 Service Menu (Menu 3)
C.6.1 Service Status Menu (Menu 3)
The Service status submenu displays the selected services.
Table C.15: Service Menu
Menu # Display Title: SERVICE
3 XXXXX YYYYY
ZZZZZZ
Description
XXXXXX displays the services selected.
YYYYY displays the number of services selected.
ZZZZZ displays the status of the services selected.
C.6.2 Video Menu (Menu 3.1)
The Video menu contains information about the currently decoded MPEG-2 video.
Table C.16: Video Menu
Menu # Display Title: VIDEO
3.1 XX STREAMS PID ZZZZ
YYYY
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
FRAME RATE YY.YY Hz
CODING MODE XXXXX
PIXEL ASPECT RATIO YYY
RATE BUFFER LEVEL XX
BITRATE YYYYY MBits/s
525 LINE OUTPUT XXXXX
Description
XX displays the number of video streams
ZZZZ is the editable selected video stream PID
YYYY displays the currently selected video stream status ( OK , STOP ,
FAIL )
XXXXXXXXX displays the current video resolution (e.g. 1920 x 1080 )
YY.YY displays the current video frame rate (e.g. 25 or 29.97
) in Hz
XXXXX displays the current video coding mode ( 4:2:0 or 4:2:2 )
YYY displays the current video aspect ratio (e.g. 16:9 )
XX displays the rate buffer level
YYYYY displays the bitrate in Mbit/s
XXXXX is the editable output format NTSC-M , NTSC-M NP , PAL-M
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-17
Menus
Menu # Display Title: VIDEO
3.1.5
3.1.8
3.1.10
3.1.11
3.1.12
3.1.13
3.1.14
3.1.15
3.1.16
625 LINE OUTPUT YYYYY
DEFAULT LINE STANDARD XXX
FAIL MODE YYYYYYYYYYYY
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYYYYYYY
FSYNC PAL OFFSET XXXXXX
FSYNC NTSC OFFSET YYYYYY
XXXXXX
4:2:0 DELAY XXX
4:2:2 DELAY YYY
MONITOR ASPECT RATIO XXXX
OUTPUT LEVEL YYYY
EMBEDDED AUDIO DID XXXX
CHANNEL YYYYYY
525 START LINE XX
EDH YYYYYY
ACTIVE FORMAT DESCRIPTOR
XXXXXX
BLANK ON VIDEO RESTART
XXXXXX
LINE 23 BLANK (625 ONLY)
XXXXXX
Description
YYYYY is the editable output format PAL-B/G/I , PAL-N , PAL-N CMB
XXX is the editable default line output ( 525 or 625 )
YYYYYYYYYYYY is the editable parameter for setting the response to loss of video ( FREEZE FRAME , BLACK FRAME , NO SYNCS , RED +
TEXT )
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is the editable video test pattern to be displayed - PAL and NTSC options available ( NONE , PULSE & BAR ,
MULTIBURST , PULSE & STEP) , MAGENTA STEP & FLAT , FLAT
FIELD RED , LUMINANCE RAMP , YUV LEGAL RAMPS , 100%
COLOUR BARS , MULTI PATTERN , BLACK )
XXXXXXX is the editable parameter for framesync enable ( ENABLED or
DISABLED )
YYYYYYYY displays the presence of a framesync input ( SIGNAL NOT
PRESENT , SIGNAL PRESENT , FRAME RATE MISMATCH , SIGNAL
LOCKED )
XXXXXX is the editable PAL framesync offset range –199999 to
+199999 pixels
YYYYYY is the editable NTSC framesync offset range –199999 to
+199999 pixels
XXXXXX is the editable selection of PTS conformance ( STRICT (FS
ADJUST), STRICT or NORMAL )
XXX is the editable value of 4:2:0 delay ( 0 to 199 ms )
YYY is the editable value of 4:2:2 delay ( 0 to 199 ms )
XXXX is the editable aspect ratio ( 16:9 or 4:3 )
YYYY is the output level in percentage ( 0 to 100% )
XXXX is the editable DID
YYYYYY is the editable embedded audio channel selection ( NONE ,
ONE & TWO , TWO , ONE )
XX is the editable 525 start line ( 22 or 23 )
YYYYYY is the editable EDH ( ENABLED or DISABLED )
XXXXXX displays the active format descriptor ( NOT AVAILABLE ,
OTHER?
)
XXXXXX is the editable selection to blank on restart ( ENABLED or
DISABLED )
XXXXXX is the editable selection to blank line 23 when 625 line output selected ( ENABLED or DISABLED )
Page C-18 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
C.6.3 Audio 1 Menu (Menu 3.2)
The Audio 1 signal status submenu contains information about the audio format and status of the currently decoded audio stream on the primary audio output.
Table C.17: Audio 1 Menu
Menus
Menu # Display Title: AUDIO 01
3.2 XX STREAMS PID YYYY
WWWW WWWW W VVV ZZZZ
3.2.1 SAMPLING RATE XX.X kHz
BITRATE YYY kbit/s
Description
XX displays the number of audio streams present
YYYY displays the currently selected audio1 PID
ZZZZ displays the stream status ( OK , STOP , FAIL )
VVV displays the audio layer ( MUS , LIN , DD )
WWWWWWW displays the audio language
XX.X displays the audio 1 sample rate
YY displays the audio 1 bitrate
XXX.X is the audio 1 decoding delay (range +/- 0 to 49ms )
3.2.3
XXX.X ms
DIGITAL OUTPUT XXXXX
ROUTING YYYYYY
3.2.4
3.2.5
CLIPPING LEVEL XX dB
AC-3 DOWNMIX METHOD
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
3.2.6 ATTENUATION
XXXX
3.2.7
3.2.8
PPM -24 -6 0
-
∞ dB XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PEAK -24 -6 0
-
∞ dB XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXX is the editable audio 1 digital output format ( AES3 OR AC-3 )
YYYYYY is the editable audio 1 output routing ( STEREO , MIXED TO
BOTH , LEFT TO BOTH , RIGHT TO BOTH )
XX is the editable audio 1 clipping value ( 12 – 24 dB )
XXXXXXXXXXXXX is the editable Dolby Digital AC-3 downmix parameter ( SURROUND STEREO , CONVENTIONAL STEREO )
XXXX is the editable attenuation level ( 0 to 24 dB in 2 dB steps,
OPTION NOT FITTED , if not fitted)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX displays a bargraph of the current audio 1 level, updated once per second - the Peak Program Meter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX displays a bargraph of the highest detected audio
1 level since reset of the infinite peak hold (available via edit key), updated once per second.
C.6.4 Audio 2 Menu (Menu 3.3)
The Audio 2 signal status submenu contains information about the audio format and status of the currently decoded audio stream on the secondary audio output.
Table C.18: Audio 2 Menu
Menu # Display Title: AUDIO 02
3.3 XX STREAMS PID YYYY
WWWW WWWW W VVV ZZZZ
3.3.1 SAMPLING RATE XX.X kHz
BITRATE YYY kbit/s
Description
XX displays the number of audio streams present
YYYY displays the currently selected audio 2 PID
ZZZZ displays the stream status ( OK , STOP , FAIL )
VVV displays the audio layer ( MUS , LIN , DD )
WWWWWWW displays the audio language
XX.X is the audio 2 sample rate
YY is the audio 2 bitrate
XXX.X is the audio 2 decoding delay (range +/- 0 to 49ms )
3.3.3
3.3.4
XXX.X ms
DIGITAL OUTPUT XXXXX
ROUTING YYYYYY
CLIPPING LEVEL XX dB
XXXXX is the editable audio 2 digital output format ( AES3 OR AC-3 )
YYYYYY is the editable audio 2 output routing ( STEREO , MIXED TO
BOTH , LEFT TO BOTH , RIGHT TO BOTH )
XX is the editable audio 2 clipping value ( 12 – 24 dB )
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-19
Menus
Menu # Display Title: AUDIO 02
3.3.5
3.3.6 ATTENUATION
XXXX
3.3.7
AC-3 DOWNMIX METHOD
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
3.3.8
PPM -24 -6 0
-
∞ dB XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PEAK -24 -6 0
-
∞ dB XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Description
XXXXXXXXXXXXX is the editable Dolby Digital AC-3 downmix parameter ( SURROUND STEREO , CONVENTIONAL STEREO )
XXXX is the editable attenuation level ( 0 to 24 dB in 2 dB steps,
OPTION NOT FITTED , if not fitted)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX displays a bargraph of the current audio 1 level, updated once per second - the Peak Program Meter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX displays a bargraph of the highest detected audio
1 level since reset of the infinite peak hold (available via edit key), updated once per second.
C.6.5 Async Data Menu (Menu 3.4)
The Async Data submenu allows status monitoring and configuration of the low speed data.
NOTE…
Low-speed data is not available when the High-speed sync option TT1260/HWO/HSDATA is purchased.
Table C.19: Async Data Menu
Menu # Display Title: ASYNC DATA Description
3.4
3.4.2
3.4.3
WW STREAMS PID XXXX
YYYYYYYYYYY
YYYYYYYY ZZZZ
DVB ASYNC BAUD RATE
XXXX
USER SYNC DATA FORMAT
XXXX
WW displays the number of low-speed data streams present
XXXX is the editable LSD PID
YYYYYYYYYYY is the stream status ( PRESENT , NOT PRESENT )
XXXXX displays the asynchronous data bitrate ( up to 38400 bit/s )
YYYYYYYY is the editable control ( ENABLED or DISABLED )
ZZZZ is the output status ( OK , STOP , FAIL )
XXXX is the editable baud rate ( 1200 , 2400 , 4800 , 9600 , 192000 ,
38400 )
XXXX is the editable data format ( TTV#2 , DVB )
C.6.6 Sync Data Option Menu (Menu 3.4)
The Sync Data submenu allows status monitoring and configuration of the RS-422 high speed data.
NOTE…
The High-speed sync option is only available when option TT1260/HWO/HSDATA is purchased. Lowspeed data is not available in this instance.
Page C-20 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Table C.20: Sync Data Menu
Menu # Display Title: ASYNC DATA Description
3.4
3.4.2
3.4.3
WW STREAMS PID XXXX
YYYYYYYYYYY
YYYYYYYY ZZZZ
DVB SYNC BAUD RATE
XXXX
USER SYNC DATA FORMAT
XXXX
WW displays the number of high-speed data streams present
XXXX is the editable HSD PID
YYYYYYYYYYY is the stream status ( PRESENT , NOT PRESENT )
XXXXX displays the synchronous data bitrate ( up to 2048 kbit/s )
YYYYYYYY is the editable control ( ENABLED or DISABLED )
ZZZZ is the output status ( OK , STOP , FAIL )
XXXX is the editable baud rate ( 1200 , 2400 , 4800 , 9600 , 192000 ,
38400 )
XXXX is the editable data format ( TTV#2 , DVB )
Menus
C.6.7 Ethernet Data Menu (Menu 3.5)
The Ethernet Data submenu allows status monitoring and configuration of the high-speed data over Ethernet option (TT1260/SWO/HSETHER), if fitted.
Table C.21: High Speed Data Over Ethernet Menu
Menu # Display Title: ETHERNET DATA Description
3.5
3.5.2
3.5.3
USER PID XXXX
YYY PIPE ZZZZ
YYY ZZZZ
PACKETS LOST XX
FRAMES LOST YY
FORWARD TO GATEWAY XXX
GATEWAY YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY
XXXX displays the editable selected HSD PID ( OPTION NOT
FITTED , if not fitted)
YYY displays the stream status ( PRESENT , NOT PRESENT )
ZZZZ is the status of the service ( OK , STOP , FAILED )
X.XX displays the data bitrate
YYY is the editable control ( ENABLED or DISABLED )
ZZZZ displays the output status ( OK , STOP , FAIL )
XX displays the number of packets lost
YY displays the number of frames lost
XXX is the editable control ( ON or OFF )
YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY is the editable destination gateway, when XXX is set to ON.
C.6.8 Teletext Menu (Menu 3.6)
The Teletext submenu the Teletext component to be enabled and a PID to be allocated.
Table C.22: Teletext Menu
Menu # Display Title: TELETEXT
3.6 XX STREAMS PID YYYY
WWWW WWWW W
3.6.1 INSERTION
XXXXXX YYYY
XXXXXX
Description
XX displays the number of Teletext streams present
YYYY is the editable selected Teletext PID
WWWWWWW displays the audio language
XXXXXX is the editable control ( ENABLED or DISABLED )
YYYY is the Teletext status ( OK , STOP , FAIL )
XXXXXX is the editable control ( ENABLED or DISABLED )
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-21
Menus
C.6.9 VBI Menu (Menu 3.7)
The VBI status submenu displays the current status of the VBI components.
NOTE…
The VITC menu functionality is not supported in software version 1.0.0.
Table C.23: VBI Menu
Menu # Display Title: VBI
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.6
3.7.7
3.7.8
3.7.9
XX STREAMS PID YYYY
ZZZZZZ
VPS XXXX
YYYYYY ZZZZ
WSS XXXX
YYYYYY ZZZZ
VITC INSERTION
YYYY ZZZZ
VITC 525 LINES XXXX
VITC 625 LINES YYYY
VIDEO INDEX XXXX
YYYYYY ZZZZ
AMOL 1 and 2 XXXX
YYYYYY ZZZZ
CLOSED CAPS XXXX
YYYYYY ZZZZ
ITS INSERTION
XXXX YYYY
NTSC PEDESTAL INSERTION
XXXX
Description
XX displays the number of VBI streams present
YYYY displays the editable selected VBI PID
ZZZZZZ indicates the status ( NO SELECTION , OK , FAIL )
XXXX displays the presence of Video Programming System ( PRESENT ,
NOT PRESENT )
YYYYYY is the editable control ( ENABLED , DISABLED )
ZZZZ displays the VPS status ( FAIL , OK )
XXXX displays the presence of Wide Screen Switching ( PRESENT ,
NOT PRESENT )
YYYYYY is the editable control ( ENABLED -0 VBI PID , ENABLED –
VIDEO A/R , DISABLED )
ZZZZ displays the WSS status ( FAIL , OK )
YYYY is editable selection of Vertical Interval Time Code ( GOP , PES ,
AUTO , DISABLED )
ZZZZ displays the VITC status ( FAIL , OK )
XXXX is the editable selection of 525-line VITC ( lines 10 to 22 )
YYYY is the editable selection of 625-line VITC ( lines 06 to 22 )
XXXX displays the presence of video index ( PRESENT , NOT
PRESENT )
YYYYYY is the editable control ( ENABLED , DISABLED )
ZZZZ displays the video index status ( FAIL , OK )
XXXX displays the presence of Automatic Measure of Line-ups
( PRESENT , NOT PRESENT )
YYYYYY is the editable control ( ENABLED , DISABLED )
ZZZZ displays the video index status ( FAIL , OK )
XXXX displays the presence of Closed Captioning ( PRESENT , NOT
PRESENT )
YYYYYY is the editable control ( ENABLED , DISABLED )
ZZZZ displays the closed captioning status ( FAIL , OK )
XXXX is the editable control of the Insertion Test Signal ( ENABLED
(CCIR) , ENABLED (FCC/UK) , DISABLED )
YYYY displays ITS status ( FAIL , OK )
XXXX is the editable selection ( ENABLED , DISABLED )
Page C-22 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Menus
C.6.10 PCR PID Menu (Menu 3.8)
The PCR PID submenu displays the Program Clock Reference packet identifier and its status.
Table C.24: PCR PID Menu
Menu # Display Title: PCR PID
3.8
3.8.1
PCR PID XXXX
YYYYYYYYYY
PCR DRIVER VERSION
YYYY
Description
XXXX is the editable selection of the PCR PID
YYYYYYYYYY is the PCR status ( PRESENT , NOT PRESENT )
YYYY is the editable selection of the PCR driver. For TT1260 Hardware
Rev 6 two options are available ( V1.0
or V2.0
). For TT1260 Hardware
Rev 4 only one option is available ( V1.0
)
C.6.11 Network ID Menu (Menu 3.9)
The Network ID submenu displays the network ID and the Original Network ID from the current Service Description Tables.
Table C.25: Network ID Menu
Menu # Display Title: NETWORK ID Description
3.9 NETWORK ID XXXXX
ORIGINAL NETWORK ID YYYYY
XXXXXX displays the network ID from the current Service Description Table
(or ----- when SDT not available)
YYYYY displays the original network ID from the current Service Description
Table (or ----- when SDT not available)
C.6.12 TTV Private Data (Menu 3.10)
The TTV Private Data submenu displays the PID of TTV private data.
Table C.26: Network ID Menu
Menu # Display Title: TTV PRIVATE
DATA
3.10 TTV PRIVATE DATA
XXXXX
Description
XXXXX displays the TANDBERGTV private data component PID (Stream ID
(0xF2).
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-23
Menus
C.7 CA Menu (Menu 4)
The CA menu allows the user to display and edit the conditional access parameters.
NOTE:
CA menu options are dependent on the hardware option fitted.
4.7
4.8
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.4
4.5
4.2
4.3
4.6
Table C.27: CA Menu
Menu #
4
4.1
Display Title: CA
XXXXX
RAS XXXXXX
KEY YYYYYY
SIGNAL PROTECTION
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX
YYYYYYYYYYYY
DIRECTOR 5
XXXXXX
DIRECTOR
XXXXXX
MODE X
KEY YYYYYYYYYY
USER ID ONE
XXXXXXXXXX
USER ID TWO
XXXXXXXXXX
PROVIDER LOCK
PROVIDER ID XXXXXX
TRANSPORT STREAM OUTPUT
XXXXXX
Description
XXXX displays the type of conditional access selected ( CLEAR OR
UNKNOWN CA if none selected).
XXXXXX is the editable CA selection mode ( DSNG KEY MODE ,
FIXED KEY MODE )
YYYYYY is the editable seven-digit key, available when DSNG KEY
MODE is selected.
XXXXXX is the editable selection ( ENABLED or DISABLED ).
XXXXXXXXXXXX displays the CA type ( NONE , if none)
YYYYYYYYYYYY displays the status of the CA type
XXXXX displays the presence of the TANDBERG TV DirectorV5 option (OPTION NOT FITTED, if not fitted).
XXXXX displays NCP messages of the Director option (OPTION
NOT FITTED, if not fitted).
X is the editable selection ( 1 , E FIXED , E TTV , E USER ONE , E
USER TWO ).
YYYYYYYYYY is the editable 16-digit hexadecimal key.
XXXXXXXXXX is the editable 14-digit hexadecimal BISS key one.
XXXXXXXXXX is the editable 14-digit hexadecimal BISS key two.
XXXXXX displays the provider identifier.
XXXXXX is editable selection ( ENCRYPTED , DECRYPTED ,
PARTIALLY DECRYPTED ).
Page C-24 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
C.8 Alarms Menu (Menu 5)
The Alarms submenu allows the selection of alarm conditions to trigger the alarm relay.
Menus
NOTE…
The Alarm menus displayed are dependent on the hardware input card type fitted.
5.X
5.X
5.X
5.X
5.X
Table C.28: Alarm Status Menu
Menu # Display Title: ALARMS
5
5.X
5.X
5.X
VVVV WWWW UUU
XXXXX YYYYYY ZZZZZZ
IF MER LESS THAN XX.X
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
If PBER EXCEEDS X.X E-X
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
If BER EXCEEDS X.X E-X
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
IF NO TRANSPORT STREAM
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
IF VIDEO NOT RUNNING
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
IF AUDIO 01 NOT RUNNING
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
IF AUDIO 02 NOT RUNNING
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
IF TEMP EXCEEDS 65 ˚ C
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY
Description
VVV is BER , or NONE
WWWW is LOCK
YYYYYY is AUDIO 1
ZZZZZZZ is AUDIO 2
WWWW is LOCK
UUU is MER
XX.X is the editable modulation error ratio 0 to 69.9
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY is editable: NO ALARM , SET ALARM ONLY , SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 to 6 , SET RELAY 1 to 6 .
X.X E-X is editable Pre-viterbi bit error rate 9.9 E-1 to 1.0 E-8
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY is editable: NO ALARM , SET ALARM ONLY , SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 to 6 , SET RELAY 1 to 6 .
X.X E-X is editable bit error rate 9.9 E-1 to 1.0 E-8
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY is editable: NO ALARM , SET ALARM ONLY , SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 to 6 , SET RELAY 1 to 6 .
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY is editable: NO ALARM , SET ALARM ONLY , SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 to 6 , SET RELAY 1 to 6 .
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY is editable: NO ALARM , SET ALARM ONLY , SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 to 6 , SET RELAY 1 to 6 .
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY is editable: NO ALARM , SET ALARM ONLY , SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 to 6 , SET RELAY 1 to 6 .
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY is editable: NO ALARM , SET ALARM ONLY , SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 to 6 , SET RELAY 1 to 6 .
YYYYYYYYYYYYYY is editable: NO ALARM , SET ALARM ONLY , SET
ALARM AND RELAY 1 to 6 , SET RELAY 1 to 6 .
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-25
Menus
C.9.1 System Overview Menu (Menu 6)
The System Overview submenu displays the system date and time.
Table C.29: System Overview Menu
Menu # Display Title: Setup
6 DATE: XX/XX/XXXX
TIME: YY:YY:YY
Description
XX/XX/XXXX is the date from the DVB time and date table TDT.
YY:YY:YY is the time from the DVB time and date table TDT.
C.9.2 Setup Menu (Menu 6.1)
The Setup submenu allows the user to edit the operating mode, LCD contrast, serial remote protocol, IP address, subnet mask, service hunt mode, and the customisation key.
Table C.30: Setup Menu
Menu # Display Title: Setup
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
OPERATING MODE
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
LCD CONTRAST XXXXXX
SERIAL REMOTE PROTOCOL
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
IP ADDRESS
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
SUBNET MASK
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
GATEWAY ADDRESS
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
RESTORE SYSTEM
DEFAULTS
SERVICE HUNT MODE
XXXXXXXX
INPUT STREAM SOI TYPE
XXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Description
XXXXXXXXXXXXX is editable: FRONT PANEL , SERIAL REMOTE ,
NETWORK (SNMP) , XPO (license required).
XXXXXX is editable in the range: LOW , MEDIUM , HIGH .
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is editable: RS-232 TTV , RS-232
ALTEIA AT ADDR YYY , RS-485 ALTEIA AT ADDR YYY where YYY is IRD address from 000 to 999 .
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the editable IP address.
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the editable subnet mask.
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the editable gateway address.
Restores system defaults. Press Edit to cancel and Save to activate.
XXXXXXXX is the editable parameter for setting automatic service selection ( ENABLED , DISABLED ).
XXX is the editable parameter for SOI detection ( AUTO , FORCED
ATSC , FORCED DVB ).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX is the editable parameter for entering a 22-digit, decimal customisation key.
Page C-26 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
C.9.3 IRD Details Menu (Menu 6.2)
The IRD Details submenu displays the software, firmware, hardware, PLD version and electronic serial number of the IRD.
Table C.31: IRD Details Menu
Menu # Display Title: IRD DETAILS Description
6.2 SOFTWARE VERSION
XX.XX.XX
XX.XX.XX displays the software version number.
XX.XX displays the firmware version number.
XX.XX
XXXX displays the hardware version number.
XXXX
XXXX displays the PLD version number.
6.2.4
XXXX
ELECTRONIC SERIAL NUMBER
XXXX
6.2.5 TEMPERATURE
XXXX YYYY
XXXX displays the unit serial number.
XXXX YYYY displays the unit temperature in degrees Centigrade
(Celsius) and Fahrenheit.
Menus
C.9.4 System Restart Menu (Menu 6.3)
The System Restart submenu allows the user to perform a software restart without having to remove and insert the power cable.
Table C.32: System Restart Menu
Menu # Display Title: System Restart Description
6.3 RESTART
ACTIVATE
Software restart. Press Edit to cancel and Save to activate.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page C-27
Menus
BLANK
Page C-28 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Annex D
D.
Language Abbreviations
Languages are shown in alphabetical order.
NO LANGUAGE ABBREVIATION
5 ARABIC
BASA
14 BENGALI
135 CHINESE
19 CZECH
21 DANISH
82 DUTCH
ARA
BAS
BEN
CHI
CZE
DAN
DUT
25 ENGLISH
31 FINNISH
34 FRENCH
ENG
FIN
FRE
22 GERMAN
24 GREEK
GER
GRK
40 GUJARATI GUJ
52 HEBREW
42 HINDI
HEB
HIN
44 HUNGARIAN HUN
50 ICELANDIC ICE
49 INDONESIAN IND
NO LANGUAGE ABBREVIATION
36 IRISH
51 ITALIAN
IRI
ITA
53 JAPANESE JAP
55 JAVANESE JAV
61 KOREAN KOR
MALAY MAY
83 NORWEGIAN NOR
90 PORTUGESE POR
94 ROMANIAN ROM
95 RUSSIAN RUS
27 SPANISH SPA
112 SWEDISH
117 THAI
123 TURKISH
SWE
THA
TUR
128 URDU URD
130 VIETNAMESE VIE
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contributiion Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page D-1
Language Abbreviations
The following non-ISO
1
languages are supported.
NOTE…
Only applicable for a transport stream going to an
Alteia Receiver.
LANGUAGE ABBREVIATION
MAIN ONE
AUX TWO
INT INTERNATIONAL
SOUND
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AAA
AAB
AAC
AUDIO 4
AUDIO 5
AUDIO 6
AUDIO 7
AUDIO 8
AUDIO 9
AAD
AAE
AAF
AAG
AAH
AAI
AUDIO 10
AUDIO 11
AUDIO 12
AUDIO 13
AUDIO 14
AUDIO 15
AUDIO 16
AAJ
AAK
AAL
AAM
AAN
AAO
AAP
The non-ISO languages allow tagging of audio without reference to specific languages. The system can then transmit two languages (Main and Auxiliary) which could be any type of audio.
NOTE…
The non-ISO languages need to be user defined in the MEM or Mobile Contribution Encoder for them to be available.
For language codes not supported by the IRD, the
Receiver will list ‘undefined’ as the language descriptor. This does not affect the way the audio is selected.
1 International Standards Organisation.
Page D-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contributiion Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Annex E
E.
Using the TT1260 with the
TANDBERG DirectorV5 System
Contents
E.1
Configuring the TT1260 for Use With
TANDBERG DirectorV5 ....................................E-3
Getting Started.......................................E-3
E.1.2
Using the TT1260 in the Over-air
Mode......................................................E-3
Response to Over-air Commands .....................E-4
Scope of This Section ............................E-4
E.2.2
Display On-screen Display (OSD)
Messages ..............................................E-4
Store Carrier Data..................................E-4
Set Power up Channel ...........................E-4
Force Carrier Retune .............................E-4
Force Service Selection .........................E-4
Set Emergency Channel ........................E-5
Set Relays .............................................E-5
Local Lockout.........................................E-5
Abort NCP Command ............................E-5
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page E-1
Using the TT1260 with the TANDBERG DirectorV5 System
BLANK
Page E-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
E.1
Using the TT1260 with the TANDBERG DirectorV5 System
Configuring the TT1260 for Use With TANDBERG
DirectorV5
E.1.2
You must have VideoGuard CA, a Director Smart Card and be tuned to a Director stream.
CAUTION…
Do not repeatedly insert and remove the Director Smart Card.
1. Insert the Director Smart Card before tuning to the service.
2. Check that the unit has VideoGuard installed (Menu 4.3).
3. Set the Receiver to DIRECTOR NCP mode (Menu 6.1).
4. Check that the unit is authorised for de-scrambling the selected service (Menu 4 CA should read VIDEOGUARD ENCRYPTED .)
NOTES...
1. The CA system is unrecognised if the service is shown as CLEAR (that is, unscrambled).
2. In OVER-AIR mode, menu items can not be edited. The Receiver should be moved to LOCAL control for editing.
Using the TT1260 in the Over-air Mode
This section describes the behaviour of the TT1260 when it is controlled over-air using the
Receiver Control part of the Director PC GUI.
It is assumed that the Receiver is entitled to receive Director commands. Consult the Director
Control PC GUI manual for more information.
The following commands are supported:
•
Display On-screen Display (OSD) Messages on front panel
•
Store Carrier Data
•
Set Power up Channel
•
Force Carrier Retune
•
Force Service Selection
•
Set Emergency Channel
•
Set Relays
•
Local Lockout
•
Abort NCP Command
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page E-3
Using the TT1260 with the TANDBERG DirectorV5 System
E.2 Response to Over-air Commands
E.2.1 Scope of This Section
This section describes the Receiver’s response to over-air commands.
E.2.2 Display On-screen Display (OSD) Messages
Displays a text string on the LCD front panel. The display is forced to Menu 4.3, NCP
MESSAGE. The message is displayed for a set time or until cleared from the head-end.
NOTE...
The viewing Monitor does NOT display messages; all user interaction is via the front panel.
E.2.3 Store Carrier Data
Stores a particular service as a preset channel. Subsequently, the head-end can force a service selection from this preset (see Section
Force Service Selection ). Director presets are different to those set up in LOCAL ONLY mode (see Menu 1 Presets). They are not visible to the user on the front panel LCD.
E.2.4 Set Power up Channel
Sets the Receiver power up service. If the Emergency Channel has not been set, it is set to this service. If neither the Emergency nor Power-up Channel have been set, the TT1260 will be in an indeterminate state at power up.
NOTE...
This is different to the situation in LOCAL ONLY mode, which chooses the service it last received.
E.2.5 Force Carrier Retune
Forces the Receiver to retune to a different frequency and/or service. This could be a service on a different feed (e.g. LNB input 2) or a service previously set up using the Store Carrier
Data command.
Timeouts allow the Receiver to revert to the original service after the time has expired. If the command fails, the Emergency channel is used. Enter a timeout of not less than 15 seconds
(except 0 to permanently switch to the new service) to give the Receiver time to re-tune.
This command fails if the LNBs are not set up realistically (which may happen if the source is changed).
Take care when retuning to services on different LNB inputs. Force Service Selection is more efficient if the required service is on the same frequency and LNB input.
E.2.6 Force Service Selection
Forces the Receiver to decode a different service or stored channel (which may require a retune). The command is generally used to hop between services. The Director system has to be informed of the frequency, FEC-rate and symbol-rate for each stream. This is set up using the Multiplex Element Manager (MEM). (The Director User Interface and the Director core require restarting to register changes that have been set in the MEM.)
Page E-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
E.2.7
Using the TT1260 with the TANDBERG DirectorV5 System
Set Emergency Channel
Sets the service to use in the event of a selection failure. Is activated after a specified time has elapsed. If not set, the Power up Channel is assumed. Setting the Emergency Channel allows a failure situation to be recovered.
Switches the general-purpose relays. This command does not affect the summary alarm relay.
Locks out the LOCAL CONTROL mode but status information can still be viewed. All Director commands are functional. The Receiver can be unlocked locally using a PIN number or overair using Allow Local Access.
E.2.10 Abort NCP Command
Aborts commands that have been sent but not executed. When a command is received which has an expired execute time, it is acted on immediately.
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page E-5
Using the TT1260 with the TANDBERG DirectorV5 System
BLANK
Page E-6 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Annex F
F.
Factory Defaults
Units are shipped with the following factory default parameters. Some of the input card parameters are specific to the hardware option fitted. These can be restored at any time using the System Menu. All other parameters are unaffected by restoring the factory defaults.
Menu Page Description Default
#2 Input ASI
#2 Input
QPSK/8PSK/16
QAM
#2 Input
COFDM
2.2 SOURCE
2.2 SOURCE
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
LNB FREQUENCY
SATELLITE FREQUENCY
SYMBOL RATE
MODULATION FEC
2.3.5
2.3.6
LNB 22 kHz
SEARCH RANGE
2.3.4 GAIN
2.2 SOURCE
AUTO
1
10750.0 MHz
12168.0 MHz
27.5 Msym/s
QPSK auto
OFF
Disabled
3000 kHz (5000 kHz)
HIGH
35%
AUTO
RF
2.2.4
2.3
2.3.2
2.3.3
TIME OUT
CHANNEL FREQUENCY
CHANNEL SPACE
STEP SIZE
1/32
2K
NORMAL
DISABLED
2.5 Sec
722.0 MHz
NONE
8 MHz
166 KHz
OFF
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Page F-1
Factory Defaults
Menu Page Description
#2 Input
TTV G.703
#3 Service 3.1.4
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.5
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.1
3.1.8
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.10
3.1.11
3.1.12
3.1.12
3.1.13
3.1.15
3.1.16
3.2.2
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.3.2
525LINE OUTPUT
625 LINE OUTPUT
DEFAULT LINE STANDARD
FAIL MODE
FSYNC PAL OFFSET
FSYNC NTSC OFFSET
PTS CONFORMANCE
4:2:0 DELAY
4:2:2 DELAY
MONITOR ASPECT RATIO
EMBEDDED AUDIO DID
CHANNEL
525 START LINE
BLANK ON VIDEO RESTART
LINE 23 BLANK (625 ONLY)
DELAY ADJUSTMENT
CLIPPING LEVEL
AC-3 DOWNMIX METHOD
ATTENUATION AUD 1
DELAY ADJUSTMENT
CLIPPING LEVEL
AC-3 DOWNMIX METHOD
ATTENUATION AUD 2
ASYNC DATA (High Speed RS-422 Data Enabler
Card Not Fitted)
DVB ASYNC BAUD RATE
USER ASYNC DATA FORMAT
SYNC DATA (High Speed RS-422 Data Enabler
Card Fitted)
Default
DISABLED
DISABLED
NORMAL
NTSC-M
PAL B/G/I
625
FREEZE FRAME
NONE
DISABLED
+0000
+0000
STRICT (FS Adjust)
040 ms
040 ms
16:9
100%
2FFH
ONE & TWO
23
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
+0.0 ms
AES3
STEREO
18 dB
SURROUND STEREO
0 dB
+0.0 ms
AES3
STEREO
18 dB
SURROUND STEREO
0 dB
ENABLED
9600
TTV#2
ENABLED
DISABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED 3.6.2 SYNCHRONISATION
Page F-2 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Menu Page Description
#4 CA
4.6.1
4.6.2
#5 Alarm 5.1
(menu options 5.X depend on 5.X hardware fitted) 5.X
5.X
5.X
#6 Setup
5.X
5.X
6.1
6.1.2
3.7.4
3.7.4
3.7.6
3.7.8
3.7.9
3.8.1
4.1
4.2
VITC 525 LINE
VITC 625 LINE
AMOL 1 and 2
ITS INSERTION (CCIR)
NTSC PEDESTAL INSERTION
PCR DRIVER VERSION
RAS
SIGNAL PROTECTION
USER ID 1
USER ID 2
IF MER LESS THAN
IF PBER EXCEEDS
IF BER EXCEEDS
IF NO TRANSPORT STREAM
IF VIDEO NOT RUNNING
IF AUDIO 1 NOT RUNNING
IF AUDIO 2 NOT RUNNING
IF TEMP EXCEEDS
OPERATING MODE
SERIAL REMOTE CONTROL
6.1.7
6.1.8
SERVICE HUNT MODE
INPUT STREAM SOI TYPE
6.2.1 VERSION
6.2.2 VERSION
6.2.4 ELECTRONIC SERIAL NUMBER
Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3
Factory Defaults
Default
ENABLED
ENABLED
GOP
14 and 16
19 and 21
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
ENABLED
DISABLED
V2.0 (FOR H/W TYPE 6)
V1.0 (FOR H/W TYPE 4)
DSNG MODE
UNAFFECTED
DISABLED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
ENCRYPTED
NO ALARM
NO ALARM
NO ALARM
NO ALARM
NO ALARM
NO ALARM
NO ALARM
NO ALARM
FRONT PANEL
MEDIUM
RS-232 TTV
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
DISABLED
AUTO
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
UNAFFECTED
Page F-3
Factory Defaults
BLANK
Page F-4 Reference Guide: TT1260 Contribution Receiver
ST.RE.E10100.3

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- DVB-S/S2 support
- COFDM input (option)
- Conditional access options (BISS, RAS, Director)
- ASI & QPSK inputs (options)
- SDI & composite video outputs
- Audio decoding (AC-3, uncompressed)
- Remote control (RS-232, RS-485, network)
- Frame synchronization
- TS output (encrypted or partially decrypted)
- Alarm output